481905
26
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/418
Pagina verder
MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL COLOUR SYSTEMS
Operator's Manual
for Basic Functions
EPA ENERGY STAR ® (MFD)
The United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) has introduced a voluntary programme, the ENERGY
STAR programme, to encourage the widespread and voluntary use of energy-efficient technologies that enhance
the workplace, improve product performance and prevent pollution. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, the TOSHIBA
TEC CORPORATION has determined that this copier model meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy
efficiency.
ENERGY STAR guidelines for this class of copier require ENERGY STAR copiers to have a ‘Sleep Mode’
feature that automatically makes the copier enter the sleep mode after a period of inactivity. The copier must also
automatically change to a ‘Low Power Mode’ (Automatic Energy Save) after a period of time since the last usage.
Specifically, this copier complies with the following requirements.
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c
‘Automatic Energy Save’-
The copier consumes less than 184 W (e-STUDIO2500c/3500c)/223 W (e-STUDIO3510c) during Energy
Save.
‘Automatic Energy Save’ Default Time-
The default time for the ‘Automatic Energy Save’ is 15 minutes.
‘Sleep Mode’
The copier consumes less than 80 W (e-STUDIO2500c/3500c)/95 W (e-STUDIO3510c) in the ‘Sleep
Mode’.
‘Sleep Mode’ Default Time-
The default time for the ‘Sleep Mode’ is 60 minutes (e-STUDIO2500c/3500c)/90 minutes
(e-STUDIO3510c).
Note1- The default setting for the ‘Sleep Mode’ and ‘Automatic Energy Save’ can be changed. Contact your
service representative to change the default settings noted above.
Note2- If the Fax or printer data is received in the sleep mode, the copier starts warming itself up and prints out
the data when it becomes ready. Also, when the start button or the energy saver button on the control
panel is pressed, the copier starts warming itself up.
In accordance with EPA ENERGY STAR programme guidelines, Toshiba recommends the following recycled
paper.
Great White MultiUse 20 paper
If you have any questions regarding the use of recycled paper or some recommended types of recycled paper,
please contact your authorized Toshiba dealer.
ENERGY STAR is a U.S. registered mark.
Notice to Users 1
Notice to Users
For Germany only
After a suitable place has been selected for the installation of the e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c, please
do not change it. Avoid excessive heat, dust, vibration and direct sunlight. Also, provide proper ventila-
tion as the copier emits a small amount of ozone.
The unit is classified as Class 1 Laser Product according to IEC 60825-1:1993/EN 60825-1.1994
including amendments.
The unit uses laser diode of output 25 mW, wave length 790 nm, continuous pulse.
Warning:
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which
case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Working environment
From EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) point of view, the operation of this product is being restricted
in following environments:
yMedical Environments: This product is not certified as a medical product according to the Medical
Product Directive 93/42/EEC.
yDomestic environments (e.g. a private living room with TV / Radio sets in the nearby surrounding
area) because this is a so called EMC class A product. In a domestic environment this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures!
Any consequences resulting from the use of this product in restricted working environments are not the
responsibility of TOSHIBA TEC.
The consequences of the use of this product in restricted working environments may be an electromag-
netic interference with other devices or machines in the nearby surrounding area. This can result into
malfunction including data loss / data error pertaining to this product or the other devices / machines
involved in the electromagnetic interference.
Furthermore, for general safety reasons, the use of this product in environments with explosive atmo-
spheres is not permitted.
CE compliance
This product is labelled with the CE mark in accordance with the provisions of the applicable European
Directives, notably the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and the Electromagnetic Compatibility Direc-
tive 2004/108/EEC for this product and the electric accessories, the Radio Equipment and Telecommu-
nications Terminal Equipment Directive 99/5/EEC for the telecommunication accessories.
CE marking is the responsibility of TOSHIBA TEC GERMANY IMAGING SYSTEMS GmbH, Carl-
Schurz-Str. 7, 41460 Neuss, Germany, phone +49-(0)-2131-1245-0.
For a copy of the related CE Declaration of Conformity please contact your dealer or TOSHIBA TEC.
Machine Noise Information
Ordinance 3. GPSGV: The maximum sound pressure level is equal or less than 70 dB(A) according to
EN ISO 7779
2 Notice to Users
Following information is for EU-member states only:
This product is marked according to the requirement in EU-Directive 2002/96/EC.
(Directive on Waste electrical and electronic equipment - WEEE)
The use of the symbol indicates that this product may not be disposed as unsorted municipal waste and
has to be collected separately. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent
potential negative consequences for the environment and human health, which could otherwise be
caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product.
For more detailed information about the take-back and recycling of this product please contact your sup-
plier where you purchased the product.
Lineup of Our Manuals 3
Lineup of Our Manuals
Thank you for purchasing the Toshiba multifunctional digital colour systems e-STUDIO2500c/
3500c/3510c.
We have provided you with these manuals for the operation of this equipment. Select and read
the manual best suited to your needs.
Quick Start Guide
This Quick Start Guide describes the initial setup method of this equip-
ment and accessories of this product such as operator’s manuals and
CD-ROMs.
Operators Manual for Basic Functions
This Operator’s Manual Basic Functions describes how to use the basic
functions of this equipment mainly focusing on the copying function.
Also this manual contains safety precautions for users to be observed.
Be sure to read it first carefully.
User Functions Guide
This User Functions Guide describes the functions and settings under
the [USER FUNCTIONS] button on the control panel of this equipment.
Colour Guide
This colour Guide simply explains the functions such as “copy density
adjustment”, “colour adjustment”, “copy editing”, “image editing” and
“image processing” in colour. This guide also includes the basic knowl-
edge of colour.
Other guides are provided by the User Documentation CD-ROM in PDF files:
TopAccess Guide
This TopAccess Guide explains how to operate and set up the network
functions such as the network scanning function and job management,
using the TopAccess (Web-based utility) from client computers.
4 Lineup of Our Manuals
Network Administration Guide
This Network Administration Guide explains the guidelines for setting up
network servers to provide various network services, and troubleshoot-
ing for network administrators.
Printing Guide
This Printing Guide explains how to install the client software for printing
from Microsoft Windows, Apple Mac OS, and UNIX computers, and print
to the equipment.
Scanning Guide
This Scanning Guide explains how to operate the scanning function of
this equipment.
e-Filing Guide
This e-Filing Guide explains how to operate the e-Filing function using
the TWAIN driver, File Downloader and e-Filing web utility.
Network Fax Guide
This Network Fax Guide explains how to use the network fax function
that enable users to operate fax and internet fax sending from a client
computer via network.
Lineup of Our Manuals 5
To read manuals in PDF (Portable Document Format) files
Viewing and printing this operator’s manual in PDF files require that you install Adobe Reader or
Adobe Acrobat Reader on your PC. If Adobe Reader or Adobe Acrobat Reader is not installed
on your PC, download and install it from the website of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
User Management Guide
This User Management Guide describes how to manage this equipment
using the functions of “Department Management”, “User Management
Setting” and “User Authentication for Scan to E-mail”.
6 Before Reading This Manual
Before Reading This Manual
This operator’s manual describes the following:
yHow to use this equipment
yHow to inspect and carry out maintenance on this equipment
yHow to remedy mechanical and copying problems
Precautions in this manual
To ensure correct and safe use of this equipment, this operator’s manual describes safety pre-
cautions according to the three levels shown below.
You should fully understand the meaning and importance of these items before reading this
manual.
Other than the above, this manual also describes information that may be useful for the opera-
tion of this equipment with the following signage:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result
in death, serious injury, or serious damage, or fire in the equipment or sur-
rounding assets.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injury, partial damage of the equipment or surrounding
assets, or loss of data.
Indicates information to which you should pay attention when operating the
equipment.
Describes handy information that is useful to know when operating the equip-
ment.
Pages describing items related to what you are currently doing. See these
pages as required.
Before Reading This Manual 7
Description of original/paper direction
Paper or originals of A4 and B5 size can be placed either in a portrait direction or in a landscape
direction. In this manual, “-R” is added to this paper size when this size of paper or original is
placed in a landscape direction.
e.g.) A4 size original on the original glass
Paper or originals of A3 or B4 size can only be placed in a landscape direction, therefore “-R” is
not added to these sizes.
Trademarks
yMicrosoft and Windows are the trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the US and other
countries.
yAdobe, Acrobat, Adobe Reader and Adobe Acrobat Reader are the trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
yOther company or product names shown in this manual may be a brand name or a trade-
mark of each company.
©2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written
permission of TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION. No patent liability is assumed, however, with
respect to the use of the information contained herein.
Placed in a portrait direction: A4 Placed in a landscape direction: A4-R
8 Before Reading This Manual
CONTENTS 9
CONTENTS
Notice to Users .............................................................................................1
Lineup of Our Manuals.................................................................................3
Before Reading This Manual .......................................................................6
Toshiba Quality is Second to None .......................................................... 17
Features of the e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c .......................................... 19
General Precautions...................................................................................21
Disclaimer Notice .......................................................................................27
Forgery Prevention Function/Storage of Colour Copies ........................28
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING EQUIPMENT
Description of Each Component...............................................................30
Front / Right side .....................................................................................30
Left side / Inner side ................................................................................32
Configuration of options...........................................................................34
Control panel ...........................................................................................37
Adjustment of the angle of the control panel ...........................................39
Touch panel.............................................................................................41
Preparation 1- Turning Power On/Off ......................................................45
Turning power on.....................................................................................45
When department or user management is used .....................................46
Turning power off (Shutdown) .................................................................50
Preparation 2- Setting Copy Paper ..........................................................54
Acceptable copy paper ............................................................................54
Setting copy paper (size change) ............................................................56
Changing the setting of paper size ..........................................................61
Drawer for special uses ...........................................................................62
Placing paper in the Large Capacity Feeder (optional) ........................... 65
Chapter 2 HOW TO MAKE COPIES
Setting Originals.........................................................................................68
Acceptable originals ................................................................................68
Placing originals on the glass..................................................................70
Using the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (optional) .................72
Making Copies ............................................................................................76
Initial (Default) settings ............................................................................76
Copying procedure ..................................................................................77
Scanning the next originals during copying (Auto job start) .................... 82
Interrupt copying in progress and make other copies
(Interrupt copying) ................................................................................... 84
10 CONTENTS
Bypass Copying .........................................................................................85
Bypass copying ....................................................................................... 85
Bypass copying on standard size paper..................................................86
Bypass copying on non-standard size paper...........................................91
Proof Copy ..................................................................................................95
Chapter 3 SETTING OF BASIC COPY MODES
Paper Selection...........................................................................................98
Automatic Paper Selection (APS)............................................................98
Manual paper selection .........................................................................100
Copying mixed-sized originals in one operation (mixed original size) ..101
Switching Colour Mode............................................................................103
Enlargement and Reduction Copying ....................................................104
Automatic Magnification Selection (AMS) .............................................104
Specifying both original size and copy size separately .........................106
Using the zoom buttons or the one-touch zoom buttons .......................108
Copying photo originals in the best reproduction ratio
for copy paper size ................................................................................110
Selecting Finishing Modes ......................................................................114
Type of finishing mode ..........................................................................114
Name of each part in the Finisher (optional) .........................................115
Sort/Group copying................................................................................116
Rotate sort mode ...................................................................................118
Staple sort mode ...................................................................................120
Magazine sort & saddle stitch mode (booklet mode).............................122
Hole punch mode (optional) ..................................................................125
Manual stapling (MJ-1101 only) ............................................................127
Duplex Copying ........................................................................................129
1-sided original -> 1-sided copy (default setting at installation).............130
1-sided original -> 2-sided copy ............................................................131
2-sided original -> 2-sided copy ............................................................132
2-sided original -> 1-sided copy ............................................................133
Book-type original -> 2-sided copy ........................................................134
Original Mode............................................................................................138
Copy Density Adjustment........................................................................140
Automatic copy density mode................................................................140
Manual copy density mode....................................................................141
Chapter 4 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Colour Balance (YMCK Adjustment) ......................................................144
CONTENTS 11
RGB Adjustment.......................................................................................146
One-Touch Adjustment............................................................................147
Background Adjustment..........................................................................148
Sharpness .................................................................................................149
Twin Colour (2-Colour) Copy...................................................................150
TWIN COLOUR SELECTABLE.............................................................150
RED & BLACK.......................................................................................153
Monocolour copying ................................................................................156
Hue ............................................................................................................157
Saturation ................................................................................................158
Chapter 5 USING THE EDITING FUNCTIONS
IMAGE SHIFT ............................................................................................161
Creating a right or left margin ................................................................161
Creating a top or bottom margin............................................................163
Creating a bookbinding margin..............................................................165
EDGE ERASE ............................................................................................167
BOOK CENTRE ERASE............................................................................169
DUAL PAGE ..............................................................................................171
2IN1 / 4IN1 .................................................................................................173
MAGAZINE SORT .....................................................................................176
EDITING .....................................................................................................178
Trimming / Masking ...............................................................................178
Mirror image ..........................................................................................181
Negative/Positive reversal .....................................................................182
XY ZOOM ...................................................................................................183
COVER SHEET..........................................................................................185
SHEET INSERTION ...................................................................................188
TIME STAMP .............................................................................................191
PAGE NUMBER.........................................................................................192
JOB BUILD ................................................................................................194
IMAGE DIRECTION ...................................................................................198
BOOK - TABLET .......................................................................................200
ADF / SADF ...............................................................................................201
Continuous feed mode ..........................................................................201
12 CONTENTS
Single feed mode ..................................................................................202
FULL IMAGE..............................................................................................204
IMAGE REPEAT ........................................................................................206
Chapter 6 e-FILING
e-Filing.......................................................................................................210
Creating User Boxes ................................................................................212
Changing Data of User Boxes .................................................................215
Deleting User Boxes.................................................................................218
Storing Documents in e-Filing ................................................................220
Printing Stored Documents .....................................................................225
Printing the whole document .................................................................225
Test printing...........................................................................................227
Printing the stored document after changing the settings .....................228
Deleting Folders or Documents ..............................................................230
Appendix ...................................................................................................232
Storing documents in the shared folder.................................................232
Chapter 7 TEMPLATE
Template....................................................................................................238
Template in “Useful Template” ..............................................................238
Registering User Groups and Templates...............................................240
Registering a template in the public template group .............................240
Registering the new user group.............................................................246
Registering a template in the user group...............................................249
Changing Data of User Groups and Templates.....................................254
Changing the data of a user group ........................................................254
Changing the data of a template ...........................................................257
Recalling Templates.................................................................................262
When recalling a template in a public group..........................................262
When recalling a template in a user group............................................264
Deleting User Groups or Templates .......................................................267
Deleting a user group ............................................................................267
Deleting a template................................................................................269
Chapter 8 JOB STATUS
Job Status .................................................................................................274
CONTENTS 13
Confirming Print Job Status....................................................................275
Print jobs ...............................................................................................275
Proof print jobs ......................................................................................279
Private print jobs....................................................................................282
When using department codes..............................................................287
USB print ...............................................................................................290
Confirming Scan Job Status ...................................................................295
Log List......................................................................................................296
Confirming job history in log list.............................................................297
Registering into address book from log lists..........................................301
Printing journals (send/receive log list)..................................................303
Print Status Display..................................................................................304
Releasing print job errors ......................................................................304
Error Code.................................................................................................307
Chapter 9 BLINKING GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
Blinking Graphic Symbols.......................................................................318
Drawer Display on the Touch Panel .......................................................319
Replace Toner Cartridge Symbol............................................................320
Recommendation for original toner .......................................................321
Replacing the toner cartridge ................................................................322
Cleaning the slit glasses........................................................................323
Cleaning the chargers ...........................................................................326
Replace Toner Bag Symbol .....................................................................327
Jam Symbols ............................................................................................329
Misfeed in the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (optional) ........329
Misfeed in drawer feeding area .............................................................332
Misfeed in the Large Capacity Feeder (optional)...................................333
Misfeed in the Paper Feed Pedestal (optional) .....................................334
Misfeed on the bypass tray....................................................................334
Misfeed in the automatic duplexing unit ................................................335
Misfeed in the jam releasing cover ........................................................336
Misfeed in the fuser unit ........................................................................337
Misfeed in the Bridge Unit (optional) ..................................................... 340
Misfeed in the Finisher and the Hole Punch Unit
(optional: MJ-1101, MJ-6101)................................................................341
Misfeed in the Saddle Stitch Finisher and the Hole Punch Unit
(optional: MJ-1030, MJ-6004)................................................................346
Misfeed in the Saddle Stitch Unit (optional)...........................................348
Call Service Symbol .................................................................................351
14 CONTENTS
Chapter 10 WHEN THIS MESSAGE APPEARS
“Toner near Empty” ...............................................................................355
“Time for Slit glass and Main charger cleaning”...................................358
Cleaning the slit glass............................................................................358
Cleaning the chargers ...........................................................................361
“Check staple cartridge” .........................................................................362
Finisher (optional: MJ-1101)..................................................................362
Finisher (optional: MJ-1030)..................................................................364
“Check staple cartridge in the Saddle Stitch Unit” ...............................366
“Examine stapler” ....................................................................................368
Finisher (optional: MJ-1101)..................................................................368
Finisher (optional: MJ-1030)..................................................................370
“READY (CHECK STAPLER)” .................................................................372
“Examine stapler in the Saddle Stitch Unit” .........................................373
“READY (CHECK SADDLE STITCH STAPLER)”....................................376
“READY (HOLE PUNCH DUST BIN IS FULL)”........................................377
Hole Punch Unit (optional: MJ-6101, MJ-6004).....................................377
“POWER FAILURE”..................................................................................378
“Time for periodic maintenance”............................................................379
“Check paper size setting on control panel for drawer N”...................380
During copying (using a drawer)............................................................380
During copying (using the bypass tray) .................................................383
During printing from the FAX or Printer (using a drawer) ......................384
During printing from the Printer (using the bypass tray) ........................386
“Cannot print this paper size Select the other drawer”.......................388
“Cannot print this paper type Set the other paper type”.....................389
“Reboot the machine”..............................................................................390
Chapter 11 MAINTENANCE
Daily Inspection ........................................................................................392
Simple Troubleshooting ..........................................................................393
Equipment does not start.......................................................................393
Paper jamming occurs frequently ..........................................................393
Display does not change when buttons or icons are pressed ...............393
Functions cannot be set ........................................................................ 394
Image density is too low ........................................................................394
Image density is too high.......................................................................394
CONTENTS 15
Image trouble ........................................................................................394
Chapter 12 SPECIFICATIONS & OPTIONS
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c Specifications .........................................398
Specifications of Options ........................................................................402
Packing List ..............................................................................................406
Copying Function Combination Matrix ..................................................407
Combination Matrix 1/2..........................................................................407
Combination Matrix 2/2..........................................................................408
Image Quality Adjustment Combination Matrix.....................................409
Combination Matrix 1/2..........................................................................409
Combination Matrix 2/2..........................................................................410
INDEX .......................................................................................................................................411
16 CONTENTS
Toshiba Quality is Second to None 17
Toshiba Quality is Second to None
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c Toner Cartridges.
It is recommended that genuine Toshiba supplies and parts be used to obtain optimum results.
18 Toshiba Quality is Second to None
Supplies / Parts
yDependability
Genuine Toshiba supplies are subjected to the strictest of inspections so that every supply
you receive will perform at optimal levels.
yHigh Productivity
Genuine Toshiba supplies are created to meet the demands of our competitive world and
provide highspeed reliable copies when you need them.
yStable Image Quality
Genuine Toshiba supplies are designed to provide consistently stable image output.
yCopier Friendly Supplies
Genuine Toshiba supplies are designed to help to keep the copier and all its parts in trouble-
free working order.
Reduction of machine wear is due to Toshiba’s intimate knowledge of the copier’s character-
istics ensuring the highest standard of care.
yPerfectly Suited Supplies
From the beginning Toshiba supplies and machines were made for each other. Whenever
Toshiba designs a new machine, it also designs a new toner that is made just for that
machine. By using genuine Toshiba supplies with Toshiba copiers, you are guaranteed opti-
mum performance.
Toner
yOptimum Image Quality
Toshiba toner is manufactured using ultra-fine quality materials under precisely controlled
conditions to ensure that your Toshiba copiers will continually generate sharp high-quality
images.
yCost Advantage
Genuine Toshiba toner provides value. Only the proper amount of toner is used during the
reproduction process, thereby enabling the machine to continue to operate until all the toner
has been used. In this way you get the full value from each cartridge used.
yEnvironmental Harmony
Genuine Toshiba toner is manufactured with the environment in mind. To protect our planet
for the benefit of future generations, we use embossed or plastic labels making our toner
cartridges fully recyclable. In addition, dust and ozone levels have been reduced to improve
the working environment.
yUser Friendly
Before approving our toners for sale, we test them to be sure that they pass the strictest of
health standards. This takes all the worry out of handling the toner.
General
yService and Support Benefits
Toshiba’s Service technicians are certified to keep your copier performing at optimum lev-
els.To ensure continuous image quality, utilize an authorized Toshiba Service provider to
care for and perform periodical maintenance on your copier.
Features of the e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c 19
Features of the e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c
The e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c is a Multifunctional Digital Colour System with high speed
and high image quality. The e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c is equipped with the network function
such as the printing and scanning one for comprehensive use to meet the needs of your office.
The e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c also provides superior cost performance for black-and-white
copying and high colour reproduction and fine colour adjustment for colour copying so that you
can make copies as expected.
The e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c offers the following convenient features, functions and
options.
yThe copying speed is as follows.
- e-STUDIO2500c
colour*1: 25 copies per minute, Black-and-white: 35 copies per minute
- e-STUDIO3500c
colour*1: 35 copies per minute, Black-and-white: 35 copies per minute
- e-STUDIO3510c
colour*1: 35 copies per minute, Black-and-white: 45 copies per minute
(when 1-sided LT landscape continuous copying is performed in the non-sort mode with-
out the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder being used)
yWarm-up time has been drastically shortened to approximately 99 seconds *2.
yAn all-in-one controller, as standard equipment, is installed to perform the effective network
functions.
yA 1/2 VGA wide panel improves operability and efficiency, and makes the viewing easier.
yA universal design is adopted for the control panel whose angle can be changed.
yFrequently used document styles can be stored in e-Filing in this equipment. You can easily
print the file in a specified style by recalling the saved style using the touch panel, or reorder
pages in the file as desired using TopAccess. Namely, one file saved in the e-Filing can be
repeatedly utilized and thus your workload is reduced.
yReceived Fax documents can be stored in e-Filing without printing them.
yScanned originals can be sent via Fax (optional) and E-mail simultaneously.
yElectronic sorting improves both colour and black-and-white copying productivity.
yComes with rich editing functions such as trimming, masking and mirror.
ySupporting High-compression PDF makes data handling smoother.
yLoading the page memory and hard disc as standard equipment enables 2in1 / 4in1, Elec-
tronic sorting and magazine sorting, etc.
yA fixing system that uses less oil reduces the amount adhering to the paper.
yBy simply replacing the cartridge, you can add toner without dirtying your hands.
yA wide variety of media from thick paper (up to 256 g/m2), sticker labels, overhead transpar-
encies, waterproof paper, etc. is acceptable.
yThe image quality technology offers successive stable copy images.
yInstalling an optional finisher offers quick automatic sorting, stapling and hole punching
(optional) of copies.
yInstalling a finisher with an optional saddle stitching function attached allows you to select
the saddle stitching mode which will automatically staple the centre of the documents just
like a book.
yTwo energy-saving features are available: 1. ENERGY SAVER MODE: Unnecessary elec-
tricity at READY status is cut off, 2. SLEEP MODE: The minimum power consumption is kept
if the equipment is not used for a specified period.
yImproved security-related features *3 ensure users of a safe and pleasant working environ-
ment.
yThe built-in wireless LAN unit and Bluetooth-compliant options are introduced to respond to
users’ wide-ranging needs.
*1 Copying speed of “Full colour”, “Auto colour”, “Twin colour” and “Mono colour”
*2 This is the value when the room temperature is 20 °C or more at rated power input with no options
installed.
20 Features of the e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c
*3 An icon appears on the touch panel when the Data Encryption Function is enabled on this equip-
ment.
< How to check active status of Data Encryption Function >
Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button on the
control panel, and then click the [COUNTER]
tab on the touch panel. This icon appears at
the right bottom of the touch panel if the Data
Encryption Function is enabled.
Contact your service technician for the use of
the Data Encryption Function.
General Precautions 21
General Precautions
When installing or moving
Warning
yThis Multifunctional Digital Colour Systems requires 220 to 240 V AC, 8 A 50/60 Hz electric
power.
Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified.
Avoid multiple connections in the same outlet. This could cause a fire or give you an electric
shock. If you are considering increasing the number of outlets, contact an electrician.
yAlways connect this Multifunctional Digital Colour Systems to an outlet with an earth connec-
tion to avoid the danger of fire or electric shock in case of short-circuiting. Contact your ser-
vice representative for the details. Be sure to use a 3-conductor, grounded wall outlet.
In areas, except U.S. and Canada, where a 2-pin plug is used, the Multifunctional Digital
Colour Systems must be grounded for safety. Never ground it to a gas pipe, a water pipe, or
any other object not suitable for grounding.
yPlug the power cord securely into the outlet. If it is not plugged in properly, it could heat up
and cause a fire or give you an electric shock.
yDo not damage, break or attempt to repair the power cord.
The following things should not be done to the power cord.
- Twisting it
- Bending it
- Pulling it
- Placing anything on it
- Making it hot
- Situating it near radiators or other heat sources
This could cause a fire or give you an electric shock. If the power cord is damaged, contact
your service representative.
yDo not install the equipment by yourself or try to move it once it has been installed. This
could result in an injury or damage to the device. Contact your service representative if the
equipment needs to be installed or moved.
yThe socket outlet shall be near the equipment and be easily accessible.
yPull out the plug from the outlet more than once a year to clean around the prongs. Accumu-
lating dust and dirt could cause a fire due to the heat released by electric leakage.
22 General Precautions
Caution
yWhen removing the plug from the outlet, do not pull the power cord. Always hold the plug
when removing it from the outlet. If the power cord is pulled, the wires may become broken
and this could cause a fire or give you an electric shock.
yMake sure that the ventilation holes are not blocked up.
If the temperature within the Multifunctional Digital Colour Systems becomes too high, a fire
could result.
yThe Paper Feed Pedestal (optional) has 4 antiskid devices and 2 fall-preventing stoppers
under its bottom. When moving this equipment, turn them in the direction of arrows (see fig-
ures below) and raise them to unfix the equipment. After it has been moved, be sure to turn
them in the opposite direction and lower them to fix it.
yDo not install the equipment by yourself or try to move it once it has been installed. This
could result in an injury or damage to the device. Contact your service representative if the
equipment needs to be installed or moved.
yDo not remove these screws. The fuser unit could fall over and injure someone.
General Precautions 23
Other points
yMake sure that there is enough space around the system to facilitate changing of parts,
maintenance and clearing paper jam.
If there is insufficient space, some operations, such as bypass feeding, will become difficult
and the Multifunctional Digital Colour Systems could even break down.
To insure optimal operation, allow clearances of at least 80 cm on the right, and 10 cm on the
left and behind.
yBe sure to fix the power cable securely so that no one trips over it.
yAdverse environmental conditions may affect the safe operation and performance of the Mul-
tifunctional Digital Colour Systems, and the Multifunctional Digital Colour Systems could
break down.
- Avoid locations near windows or with exposure to direct sunlight.
- Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.
- Avoid too much dust.
- Avoid location that suffer from vibration.
yMake sure that the air is able to flow freely and that there is sufficient ventilation.
With inadequate ventilation, the unpleasant odor released by ozone will begin to dominate
the atmosphere.
When using the Multifunctional Digital Colour Systems
Warning
yDo not take off the cover of the equipment; otherwise you could be injured or get an electric
shock.
yDo not remove or connect the plug with wet hands, as this could give you an electric shock.
yDo not place any container with liquid (flower vases, coffee cups, etc.) on or near the equip-
ment. This could cause a fire or give you an electric shock.
yKeep paper clips and staples away from the air vent. If not, a fire could result or you could
get an electric shock.
yIf the Multifunctional Digital Colour Systems becomes excessively hot, smoke comes out of it
or there is an odd smell or noise, proceed as follows.
Turn the main switch OFF and remove the plug from the outlet, then contact your service
representative.
yIf the Multifunctional Digital Colour Systems will not be used for more than one month,
remove the plug from the outlet for safety purposes during that time.
If an insulation failure occurs, this could cause a fire or give you an electric shock.
10cm 10cm
80cm
24 General Precautions
Caution
yDo not place heavy objects (4 kg or more) on the original glass and do not press on it with
force.
Breaking the glass could cause personal injury.
yDo not place heavy objects (4 kg or more) on the Multifunctional Digital Colour Systems. If
the objects fall off, this could cause injury.
yDo not touch the fuser unit or the metal area around it. Since they are very hot, you could be
burned or the shock could cause you to get your hand injured in the machine.
yWhen changing the angle of the control panel, be careful not to catch your hands in the gap
between the equipment and the control panel. This could cause personal injury.
yBe careful not to let your fingers be caught when closing the drawer. This could injure you.
yBe careful not to let your fingers be caught between the equipment and the automatic
duplexing unit. This could injure you.
yDo not place 3.3 kg or more of objects on an optional work table. Breaking the work table
could cause personal injury.
yDo not touch the metal portion of the guide plate in the automatic duplexing unit as it could
burn you.
yDo not touch the hinge (= a connecting part) on the rear side of the Reversing Automatic
Document Feeder (optional). This could catch and injure your fingers when you open or
close the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (optional).
yAlways keep hands and fingers clear of FINISHER TRAY HINGE, as the tray could move
unexpectedly. Failure to do so could result in injury to your hand and/or fingers.
General Precautions 25
Position of Certification label, etc.
Warning label
Explanatory label
Identification label
Warning for grounding wire
Warning for handling transfer belt
Warning for high temperature area
Warning for
high temperature area
(fuser unit)
Warning for
high temperature area
(fuser unit)
Warning for
high temperature area
(ventilation holes)
26 General Precautions
Other points
yBe very careful to treat the touch panel gently and never hit it. Breaking the surface could
cause malfunctions.
yDo not turn the power OFF with jammed paper left inside the Multifunctional Digital Colour
Systems.
This could cause malfunctions when the main switch is turned ON next time.
To turn the power OFF, see P.50 “Turning power off (Shutdown)”.
yBe sure to turn the power OFF when leaving the office or if there is a power outage. How-
ever, Do not turn the power OFF if the weekly timer is in use.
To turn the power OFF, see P.50 “Turning power off (Shutdown)”.
yBe careful because the paper exit area and paper just after exiting are hot.
yDo not place anything other than paper on the receiving tray. This could disturb a normal
operation and cause malfunctions.
yDo not touch the photoconductive drum surface or the transfer charger. This could cause
image problems.
During maintenance or inspection
Warning
yNever attempt to repair, disassemble or modify the Multifunctional Digital Colour Systems by
yourself. You could cause a fire or get an electric shock.
Always contact your Service representative for maintenance or repair of the internal parts of
the Multifunctional Digital Colour Systems.
yDo not let liquids such as water and oil get into the system when cleaning the floor. This
could cause a fire and give you an electric shock.
Caution
yAlways keep the plug and outlet clean. Prevent them from accumulating dust and dirt. This
could cause a fire and give you an electric shock due to the heat released by electric leak-
age.
yDo not touch the stapling area. The actual needle point could cause you personal injury.
Saddle Stitch Finisher (optional) P.373
Finisher (optional) P.368
Other points
yDo not use such solvents as thinner or alcohol when cleaning the surface of the Multifunc-
tional Digital Colour Systems.
- This could warp the shape of the surface or leave it discoloured.
- When using a chemical cleaning pad to clean it, pay attention to any cautionary points.
When handling supplies
Caution
yNever attempt to incinerate toner cartridges and toner bags. Dispose of used toner car-
tridges and toner bags in accordance with local regulations. ( P.320 “Replace Toner Car-
tridge Symbol”, P.327 “Replace Toner Bag Symbol”)
Disclaimer Notice 27
Disclaimer Notice
The following notice sets out the exclusions and limitations of liability of TOSHIBA TEC CORPO-
RATION (including its employees, agents and sub-contractors) to any purchaser or user (‘User’)
of the e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c, including its accessories, options and bundled software
(‘Product’).
1. The exclusion and limitations of liability referred to in this notice shall be effective to the full-
est extent permissible at law. For the avoidance of doubt, nothing in this notice shall be taken
to exclude or limit TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION’s liability for death or personal injury
caused by TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION’s negligence or TOSHIBA TEC CORPORA-
TION’s fraudulent misrepresentation.
2. All warranties, conditions and other terms implied by law are, to the fullest extent permitted
by law, excluded and no such implied warranties are given or apply in relation to the Prod-
ucts.
3. TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION shall not be liable for any loss, cost, expense, claim or dam-
age whatsoever caused by any of the following:
(a) use or handling of the Product otherwise than in accordance with the manuals, including
but not limited to Operator’s Manual, User’s Guide, and/or incorrect or careless handling or
use of the Product;
(b) any cause which prevents the Product from operating or functioning correctly which
arises from or is attributable to either acts, omissions, events or accidents beyond the rea-
sonable control of TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION including without limitation acts of God,
war, riot, civil commotion, malicious or deliberate damage, fire, flood, or storm, natural
calamity, earthquakes, abnormal voltage or other disasters;
(c) additions, modifications, disassembly, transportation, or repairs by any person other
than service technicians authorized by TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION; or
(d) use of paper, supplies or parts other than those recommended by TOSHIBA TEC COR-
PORATION.
4. Subject to paragraph 1, TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION shall not be liable to Customer for:
(a) loss of profits; loss of sales or turnover; loss of or damage to reputation; loss of produc-
tion; loss of anticipated savings; loss of goodwill or business opportunities; loss of custom-
ers; loss of, or loss of use of, any software or data; loss under or in relation to any contract;
or
(b) any special, incidental, consequential or indirect loss or damage, costs, expenses,
financial loss or claims for consequential compensation;
whatsoever and howsoever caused which arise out of or in connection with the Product or
the use or handling of the Product even if TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION is advised of the
possibility of such damages.
TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION shall not be liable for any loss, cost, expense, claim or dam-
age caused by any inability to use (including, but not limited to failure, malfunction, hang-up,
virus infection or other problems) which arises from use of the Product with hardware, goods
or software which TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION has not directly or indirectly supplied
28 Forgery Prevention Function/Storage of Colour Copies
Forgery Prevention Function/Storage of Colour Copies
Forgery prevention function
This copier has a forgery prevention function. Please ensure that your digital full-colour copier is
not used for making copies of prohibited items.
Storage of colour copies
yThe copies should be kept in a place which is not exposed to light to prevent fading when
they are stored for a long time.
yIf copies are kept pressed between plastics made of chloroethylene for a long time, the toner
may melt and stick to the plastic due to high pressure and high temperature. Keep them in
polyethylene binders.
yWhen a colour copy is folded, the toner at the fold can become separated.
yThe toner on the copies may melt if it touches solvent. If the ink on the copies has not com-
pletely dried, the toner may also melt. Keep copies away from solvent.
yWhen copies are kept near an extremely high temperature such as a heater, the toner may
melt. Keep them at room temperature and do not allow this to vary very much.
1.BEFORE USING EQUIPMENT
This chapter describes what you need to know before using this equipment, such as how to turn the power
ON or how to set copy paper.
Description of Each Component ...........................................................................30
Front / Right side...............................................................................................................................30
Configuration of options ....................................................................................................................34
Control panel.....................................................................................................................................37
Adjustment of the angle of the control panel.....................................................................................39
Touch panel.......................................................................................................................................41
Preparation 1- Turning Power On/Off....................................................................45
Turning power on ..............................................................................................................................45
When department or user management is used ...............................................................................46
Turning power off (Shutdown)...........................................................................................................50
Preparation 2- Setting Copy Paper........................................................................54
Acceptable copy paper......................................................................................................................54
Setting copy paper (size change)......................................................................................................56
Changing the setting of paper size....................................................................................................61
Drawer for special uses.....................................................................................................................62
Placing paper in the Large Capacity Feeder (optional) .....................................................................65
1 BEFORE USING EQUIPMENT
30 Description of Each Component
Description of Each Component
Front / Right side
1. Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (Optional, MR-3018)
A stack of originals placed on this are scanned one sheet by one. Both sides of original can
be scanned. Maximum 100 sheets (80 g/m2), 80 sheets (90 g/m2) (or stack height 16 mm) of
originals can be placed in one go.
(The maximum number of sheets may vary depending on the media type of the originals.)
P.72 “Using the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (optional)”
P.329 “Misfeed in the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (optional)”
2. Operator’s Manual pocket (Back side)
Keep the Operator’s Manual in this.
3. Automatic duplexing unit
This is a unit to make copies on both sides of paper. Open it when paper jams occur.
P.335 “Misfeed in the automatic duplexing unit”
4. Bypass tray
Use this to make copies on special media types such as overhead transparencies, water-
proof paper.
P.85 “Bypass copying”
P.334 “Misfeed on the bypass tray”
5. Paper feed cover
Open this cover when releasing a paper misfeed in the drawer feeding area.
P.332 “Misfeed in drawer feeding area”
10
9
8
7
2
1
3
4
5
6
11
12
13
14
Description of Each Component 31
6. Paper feed cover (optional)
Open this cover when releasing a paper misfeed in the Paper Feed Pedestal (optional) or
Large Capacity Feeder (optional).
P.333 “Misfeed in the Large Capacity Feeder (optional)”
P.334 “Misfeed in the Paper Feed Pedestal (optional)”
7. Paper size indicator
8. Paper Feed Pedestal (optional, KD-1018) and Additional Drawer Module (optional,
MY-1031) or Large Capacity Feeder (optional, KD-1019)
9. Drawers
Maximum 550 sheets (80 g/m2), 500 sheets (105 g/m2) of plain paper can be placed in one
go.
10. Front cover
Open this cover when you replace the toner cartridge and clean the charger.
P.320 “Replace Toner Cartridge Symbol”
P.327 “Replace Toner Bag Symbol”
P.358 ““Time for Slit glass and Main charger cleaning””
11. Power switch
Turn the power of the equipment ON or OFF with this.
P.45 “Turning power on”
12. Connector for USB storage device
Use this connector when printing files stored in a USB device or retrieving scanned data into
the USB device.
P.290 “USB print”
See the Scan Guide for details.
13. Network interface connector
Use this connector when connecting this equipment with network.
14. USB terminal (4-pin)
With this terminal, the equipment can be connected to your PC using a commercially avail-
able USB cable.
1 BEFORE USING EQUIPMENT
32 Description of Each Component
Left side / Inner side
1. Platen sheet
P.392 “Daily Inspection”
2. Original glass
Use this to copy three-dimensional originals, book-type originals and special paper such as
overhead transparencies or tracing paper, as well as plain paper.
P.68 “Setting Originals”
3. Touch panel
Use this to set copying density, colour adjustment, finishing mode and various types of other
functions.
P.41 “Touch panel”
9
11
10
8
16 15 14 13
6
7
5
4
3
2
1
(12)
Description of Each Component 33
4. Control panel
Use this to make copies, enter the number of copy sets, and perform and set various types
of other functions.
P.37 “Control panel”
5. Charger cleaner
P.358 ““Time for Slit glass and Main charger cleaning””
6. Toner bag
P.327 “Replace Toner Bag Symbol”
7. Slit glass cleaner
Use this if the copied or printed paper is stained.
P.358 ““Time for Slit glass and Main charger cleaning””
8. Paper exit stopper
Use this to prevent the exiting paper from falling. Open this when you make a large amount
of copies on a larger size of paper (e.g.A3, A4).
9. Receiving tray
Printed paper exits into this tray. The loading capacity is approx. 550 sheets (90 g/m2). (This
may vary depending on the degree of paper curling.)
10. Scanning area
The data of originals transported from the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (optional,
MR-3018) are scanned here.
P.392 “Daily Inspection”
11. Original scale
Use this to check the size of an original placed on the original glass.
12. Touch panel contrast adjustment dial
Use this when it is difficult to see the display on the touch panel.
13. Black toner cartridge
14. Cyan toner cartridge
15. Magenta toner cartridge
16. Yellow toner cartridge
P.320 “Replace Toner Cartridge Symbol”
1 BEFORE USING EQUIPMENT
34 Description of Each Component
Configuration of options
1. Original Cover (KA-3511PC)
Holds an original.
2. Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (MR-3018)
Automatically feeds a placed stack of originals one by one to have them copied.
3. Bridge Unit (KN-3500)
Acts as a relay for the finisher and this equipment.
4. Large Capacity Feeder (KD-1019)
This feeder enables you to feed up to 2500 sheets (80 g/m2), 2000 sheets (90 g/m2) of A4
paper.
5. Paper Feed Pedestal (KD-1018)
Adds one drawer to the equipment. This also enables you to install the Additional Drawer
Module (MY-1031) (optional).
6. Additional Drawer Module (MY-1031)
This drawer is for adding to the Paper Feed Pedestal (KD-1018). Combined with the 2 draw-
ers in the equipment, paper can be fed from 4 drawers in total.
7. Finisher (MJ-1101)
This finisher enables sort/group finishing and stapling. The Hole Punch Unit (optional,
MJ-6101) can be installed to this finisher. The Bridge Unit (optional, KN-3500) is required for
the installation of this finisher.
4 5 6
1 2
10 9
7
8
3
Description of Each Component 35
8. Saddle Stitch Finisher (MJ-1030)
This finisher enables saddle stitching, in addition to sort/group finishing and stapling. The
Hole Punch Unit (optional, MJ-6004) can be installed to this finisher. The Bridge Unit
(optional, KN-3500) is required for the installation of this finisher.
9. Hole Punch Unit (MJ-6101)
This unit enables you to punch holes on printouts. It can be used by installing it on the Fin-
isher (MJ-1101).
10. Hole Punch Unit (MJ-6004)
This unit enables you to punch holes on printouts. It can be used by installing it on the Fin-
isher (MJ-1030).
Other options available are as follows. Contact your service technician or Toshiba product dis-
tributors for details.
Work Table (KK-3511)
This is a small table for placing originals while the equipment is operated.
yInstalled on the right-hand side of the equipment
FAX Unit (GD-1210)
This is a unit for using the equipment as a Fax.
yInstalled inside of the equipment
2nd Line for Fax Unit (GD-1160)
This unit enables to add a line to the Fax to make it 2nd line.
yInstalled inside of the equipment
yThe Fax Unit (GD-1210) is necessary.
Desk (MH-1700)
This is a desk for the equipment.
Data Overwrite Kit (GP-1060)
This is a kit to erase the data stored temporarily when copying, printing, scanning, Fax, internet
Fax or network Fax is performed. It overwrites temporarily stored data with random data.
yInstalled inside of the equipment
512 MB Expansion Memory (GC-1250)
This is the main memory which is used for programs of the equipment and operations. This
memory enables the B4, A3 and FOLIO (LD, LG, 13" LG, COMP) size originals to be scanned
with the slim PDF format.
yInstalled inside of the equipment
256 MB Expansion Memory (GC-1260)
This is the page memory and is used for temporarily storing data during scanning or printing.
This memory enables scanning in the full colour, auto colour and image smoothing mode with
600 dpi.
yInstalled inside of the equipment
Wireless LAN Module (GN-1041)
This module enables the equipment to be used in a wireless LAN environment.
yInstalled inside of the equipment
yThe Antenna (GN-3010) is necessary.
yThe equipment cannot be connected to the wireless and wired LAN at the same time.
1 BEFORE USING EQUIPMENT
36 Description of Each Component
Bluetooth Module (GN-2010)
This module enables the Bluetooth printing.
yInstalled inside of the equipment
yThe Antenna (GN-3010) is necessary.
Antenna (GN-3010)
This is used when the Wireless LAN Module and Bluetooth Module are installed.
yWhen the Wireless LAN module (GN-1041) is installed, it is placed on the back right side of
the equipment.
yWhen the Bluetooth Module (GN-2010) is installed, it is placed on the back left side of the
equipment.
Description of Each Component 37
Control panel
Use the buttons on the control panel for various operations and settings through the equipment.
1. [HELP] button
Use this button to display the description of the functions and the buttons on the touch panel.
2. [USER FUNCTIONS] button
Use this button for paper size or media type setting of drawers, and registration of the copy,
scan and FAX settings (including a default setting change.) See the User Functions Guide
for the functions enabled by this button.
3. [TEMPLATE] button
Use this button to register and recall frequently used copy, scan, and Fax settings as a tem-
plate.
4. [EXTENSION] button
Any operation with this button is invalid at present. This button is to extend functions in the
future.
5. [e-FILING] button
Use this button to access saved image data.
6. [SCAN] button
Use this button to use the scanning function.
7. [COPY] button
Use this button to use the copier function.
8. [FAX] button
Use this button to use the FAX / Internet FAX function.
9. PRINT DATA / MEMORY RX / FAX communication lamps
These lamps show the status of FAX data reception and FAX communication. The equip-
ment can be operated even while these lamps are lit.
1 BEFORE USING EQUIPMENT
38 Description of Each Component
10. [INTERRUPT] button
Use this button to interrupt the copy job in process and perform another one. The interrupted
job is resumed by your pressing this button again.
11. [JOB STATUS] button
Use this button to confirm each job status, printing status, and FAX transmission/reception
status of a print job, scan job and FAX job. ( P.274 “Job Status”)
12. [ACCESS] button
Use this button when the department code or user information has been set. If this button is
pressed after copying, the next user cannot use functions such as copying without keying in
the department code or user information. See the User Functions Guide for the department
and user management.
13. [ENERGY SAVER / SHUTDOWN] button
Use this button when you want to shut down the equipment or when you want the equipment
enter into the energy saving mode. When you press this button, the menu for the energy
saving mode appears. Press the [SLEEP] button on this menu to enter into the energy sav-
ing mode and press the [SHUTDOWN] button to shut down the equipment.
14. [FUNCTION CLEAR] button
When this button is pressed, all selected functions are cleared and returned to the default
settings.
15. [STOP] button
Use this button to stop any scanning and copying operations in progress.
16. [START] button
Use this button to start copying, scanning and FAX operations.
17. [CLEAR] button
Use this button to correct numbers keyed in, such as the copy quantity.
18. ERROR lamp
This lamp lights when an error occurs and the equipment needs some actions to be taken.
19. [MONITOR/PAUSE] button
Use this button only when a FAX Unit (optional) is installed. (See the Operator’s Manual for
Facsimile Function for details.)
20. Digital keys
Use these keys to enter any numbers such as the copy quantity.
21. Touch panel
Use this panel for the various settings of each function of the copier, scanner and FAX. This
panel also indicates the status of the equipment, such as when you run out of paper or there
is a paper jam.
Description of Each Component 39
Adjustment of the angle of the control panel
When adjusting the angle of the control panel
The angle of the control panel is adjustable at any angle between 7 and 45 degrees from the
horizontal position.
When changing the angle of the control panel, be careful not to catch your hands in the gap
between the equipment and the control panel. This could injure you.
When fixing the angle of the control panel
The angle of the control panel can be fixed by using the stopper on the backside of the control
panel (at 7 degrees from the horizontal position). The stopper is located on A when the equip-
ment is set up. Move it from the position A to B before fixing it.
A: The position where the angle is adjustable.
B: The position where the angle is fixed.
A
B
1 BEFORE USING EQUIPMENT
40 Description of Each Component
1
Slide the stopper (in the posi-
tion A) slightly to the right, and
then pull it out.
2
Fit the latches of the stopper in
the hole of the position B and
insert them turning the stop-
per itself.
3
Shift the stopper to the left
until it clicks.
The angle of the control panel is fixed at
7 degrees.
Description of Each Component 41
Touch panel
When the power is turned on, the basic menu for the copier function appears on this touch
panel. The status of the equipment is also displayed on the touch panel with messages and illus-
trations.
* APS: Automatic paper selection, AMS: Automatic magnification selection
Message display
The following information appears at the top of the touch panel:
Equipment status, operational instructions, cautionary messages, reproduction ratios, number of
copy sets, paper size of a selected drawer, amount of paper in a selected drawer and date and
time.
Touch-buttons
Press these buttons on the touch panel lightly to set various functions.
Index buttons
Press these buttons to switch menus. The type and number of the index buttons vary depending
on the function of the copier, scanner and e-Filing.
Function setting area
This area includes buttons for selecting and setting each function.
[SETTINGS] button
Press this button to confirm currently set functions.
1. Message 10. Original mode button
2. Reproduction ratio 11. [PROOF COPY] button
3. Number of copy sets 12. Density adjustment buttons
4. APS/AMS* or currently selected paper size 13. Simplex / duplex button
5. Remaining paper level 14. Colour mode button
6. Date and time 15. Paper source selection buttons
7. [SETTINGS] button 16. Equipment status indication area
8. Finisher button 17. Function setting area
9. Enlargement/Reduction ([Zoom...]) button 18. Index buttons
7
8
9
11
10
2 3 654
1
18
17
1416 15 13 12
YYYY.MM.DD
1 BEFORE USING EQUIPMENT
42 Description of Each Component
(An example is shown below.)
Buttons appearing on the various menus are as follows (some buttons may not appear on the
menu):
Description of Each Component 43
Clearing functions selected
When you press the selected button, the function which has been selected is cleared. Or the
selected setting is cleared automatically by the automatic function clear* when the equipment
has been left inactive for a specified period of time.
* Automatic function clear:
This function works when a specified period of time has passed since the last paper exit or the
last entry of any button. This function returns all the function settings to default without the need
to press the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button. When the department or user management function is
being used, the display returns to the department code or user information input menu. When
these functions are not being used, the display returns to the basic menu of the copier function.
The period for the automatic function clear is set at 45 seconds by default at the time of installa-
tion of the equipment. See the User Functions Guide for change of this setting.
Adjusting the contrast of the touch panel
Turn this adjustment dial on the left side of the control panel to adjust the contrast of the touch
panel.
1 BEFORE USING EQUIPMENT
44 Description of Each Component
Setting letters
The following menu appears when any letter entry is required for the operations of scanning, e-
Filing, template and Internet FAX.
Use the buttons on the touch panel for letter entry and use the digital keys on the control panel
for number entry.
After entering the letters, press the [ENTER] button. The menu will be changed.
The following buttons are used for letter entry.
[Space]: Press this to enter a space.
[CANCEL]: Press this to cancel the entry of letters.
[ENTER]: Press this to fix all entered letters.
[Back Space]: Press this to delete the letter before the cursor.
: Press them to move the cursor.
[CLEAR]: Press this to delete all letters entered.
[Shift]: Press this to enter capital letters.
[Caps Lock]: Press this to switch capital letters and small letters.
[Next]: Press this to access the special keys.
Preparation 1- Turning Power On/Off 45
Preparation 1- Turning Power On/Off
Turning power on
Open the switch cover, and then turn the power switch on.
yThe equipment starts warming-up. “Wait Warming Up” appears during warming-up.
yWhile the equipment is warming up, you can use the auto job start function.
( P.82 “Scanning the next originals during copying (Auto job start)”)
The equipment will be ready for copying after about 99 seconds and “READY” appears.
When you turn the power of the equipment OFF, do not simply turn the power switch to turn it off
but be sure to shut it down.
P.50 “Turning power off (Shutdown)”
When “ERASING DATA” appears
This message appears when the Data Overwrite Kit (optional) has been installed. It appears
immediately after the power is turned ON or after the equipment has been operated. You can
operate the equipment even if it is displayed.
When the use of the equipment is managed under department management or user manage-
ment function, you need to enter the department code or user information before making a copy.
For details, see P.46 “When department or user management is used”.
1 BEFORE USING EQUIPMENT
46 Preparation 1- Turning Power On/Off
When department or user management is used
When the use of the equipment is managed under department management or user manage-
ment function, each user needs to enter the department code or user information.
Department management
You can restrict users or manage copy volumes made by an individual group or department in
your company using the department codes. When the copy volume is controlled under the
department code, enter the code after turning the power on. See the User Functions Guide for
setting and registration of the department codes.
When the power is turned on, the following menu appears.
This menu also appears when the [ACCESS] button is pressed or the automatic function clear
has worked.
Key in a department code (5 digits) previously registered and press the [ENTER] button. The
menu will switch and the equipment will be ready to be used.
If the department code keyed in is incorrect, the menu does not change. Key in the correct
department code.
When copying is finished
When you finish all operations, press the [ACCESS] button to prevent unauthorized use of the
equipment. The display returns to the department code input menu.
Preparation 1- Turning Power On/Off 47
User management
Users of the equipment can be limited and the available functions and past record of each user
can be controlled by using the user management function. When the equipment is managed
under this function, turn the power of the equipment ON and enter the information required (e.g.
user name, password) to use the equipment. The menu for entering user information also
appears when you pressed the [ACCESS] button on the control panel or automatic function
clear has worked. Enter the information following the procedure below.
1
The menu for user authentication appears.
MFP local authentication, LDAP authentication
Windows Domain Authentication
The domain name previously set by the network administrator is displayed in [DOMAIN].
If the domain name belonging to your organization is not displayed, press the [DOMAIN]
button and select it.
1 BEFORE USING EQUIPMENT
48 Preparation 1- Turning Power On/Off
2
Press the [USER NAME] button.
3
Enter the user name (maximum 128 letters) and then press the
[ENTER] button.
4
Press the [PASSWORD] button.
Preparation 1- Turning Power On/Off 49
5
Enter the password (maximum 64 letters) and then press the
[ENTER] button.
6
Press the [ENTER] button.
The menu will switch and the equipment will be ready to be used.
If the user information is incorrectly entered, the menu will not switch. In this case, press
the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button and then enter it again.
Displaying the available number of copies
The amount is determined by how many copies the user ( ) or the department ( ) has
remaining and the smaller of the two numbers is displayed.
The number appears for 5 seconds on the upper right of the screen.
COLOUR: Available number of copies for colour copying
BLACK: Available number of copies for black-and-white copying
The display differs depending on the management setting of this equipment.
When copying is finished
When you finish all operations, press the [ACCESS] button to prevent unauthorized use
of the equipment. The display returns to the one for entering user information.
1 BEFORE USING EQUIPMENT
50 Preparation 1- Turning Power On/Off
Turning power off (Shutdown)
When turning OFF the power of the equipment, be sure to shut it down following the procedure
below. Check the following three points before shutdown.
yNo jobs should be left in the print job list. ( P.274 “Job Status”)
yNone of the PRINT DATA, MEMORY RX and FAX communication lamps should be blinking.
(If the equipment is shut down while any of the above lamps is blinking, jobs in progress
such as FAX reception will be aborted.)
yNo PC should access the equipment via the network.
yDo not press the power switch to turn the power OFF, otherwise the stored data may be lost
or the hard disk may be damaged.
yWhen the equipment is shut down, the job in progress is cleared.
2
Press the [SHUTDOWN] button on the touch panel.
To cancel the shutdown operation, press the [CANCEL] button.
1
Press the [ENERGY SAVER/
SHUTDOWN] button on the
control panel.
Preparation 1- Turning Power On/Off 51
3
“Shutdown in progress” appears on the menu. After a while, the
equipment is shut down and the power is turned OFF.
The power switch automatically returns to the OFF position.
Turning the power off (Shutting down) with the [USER
FUNCTIONS] button
The equipment can also be shut down by following the procedure below.
2
Press the [USER] button on the touch panel to enter the user set-
ting menu, and then press the [SHUTDOWN] button.
1
Press the [USER FUNCTIONS]
button on the control panel.
1 BEFORE USING EQUIPMENT
52 Preparation 1- Turning Power On/Off
3
“Processing job will be deleted. Are you sure you want to shut-
down?” appears on the menu. Press the [YES] button.
To cancel the shutdown operation, press the [NO] button.
4
“Shutdown in progress” appears on the menu. After a while, the
equipment is shut down and the power is turned OFF.
The power switch automatically returns to the OFF position.
Energy Saving Mode
This equipment supports two energy saving modes; the Automatic Energy Save mode and the
Sleep Mode.
Automatic Energy Save
The equipment enters the Automatic Energy Save mode automatically after a specified period of
time*1 since its last use. During this mode, “Saving energy – Press START button” appears on
the touch panel.
Sleep Mode
The equipment enters the Sleep Mode automatically after a specified period of time*2 since its
last use. During this mode, the message of the Automatic Energy Save mode disappears and
the [ENERGY SAVER / SHUTDOWN] button lights in green.
These modes are automatically cleared upon the reception of print data, Fax data, Internet Fax
data or E-mails. They are also cleared by pressing the [START] button.
Note 1: This period is set at 15 minutes by factory default.
Note 2: This period is set at 60 minutes for the e-STUDIO2500c/3500c and 90 minutes for the e-
STUDIO3510c by factory default.
Contact your service representative to change the default settings noted above.
Preparation 1- Turning Power On/Off 53
2
Press the [SLEEP] button on the touch panel.
The equipment enters into the sleep mode. During this mode, the display on the touch
panel disappears and the [ENERGY SAVER/SHUTDOWN] button lights in green.
To cancel the energy saving mode
Press the [START] button on the control panel. The sleep mode is cleared and the equipment
will be ready for copying.
The sleep mode is also cleared by pressing any button of [ENERGY SAVER / SHUTDOWN],
[COPY], [SCAN], [FAX] and [e-FILING].
1
Press the [ENERGY SAVER/
SHUTDOWN] button on the
control panel.
1 BEFORE USING EQUIPMENT
54 Preparation 2- Setting Copy Paper
Preparation 2- Setting Copy Paper
Acceptable copy paper
*1 Automatic duplex copying is not available.
*2 Use Thick 2 mode for sticker labels.
yMultiple paper sizes cannot be set in one drawer.
y“Maximum sheet capacity” refers to the maximum number of sheets when Toshiba-recom-
mended paper is set.
yBe sure that the paper height does not exceed the line indicated inside of the guide.
y“LT format” is the standard size for only use in North America.
y“K format” is a Chinese standard size.
Abbreviations for paper sizes:
LT: Letter, LD: Ledger, LG: Legal, ST: Statement, COMP: Computer, SQ: Square
Feeder Paper type Paper size Maximum sheet capacity
Drawers (Including
optional drawers)
Plain paper
(64 - 105 g/m2)
(Standard size)
A/B format:
A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4,
B5, B5-R, FOLIO
LT format:
LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST-R,
COMP, 13"LG, 8.5"SQ
K format:
8K, 16K, 16K-R
600 sheets (64 g/m2)
550 sheets (80 g/m2)
500 sheets (81 - 105 g/m2)
Recycled paper
(64 - 105 g/m2)
Thick 1
(106 - 163 g/m2)
300 sheets
Large Capacity
Feeder (optional)
Plain paper
(64 - 105 g/m2)
(Standard size)
A4, LT
3000 sheets (64 g/m2)
2500 sheets (80 g/m2)
2000 sheets (81 - 105 g/m2)
Bypass tray Plain paper
(64 - 105 g/m2)
(Standard size)
A/B format:
A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, A6-R,
B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO,
305 x 457 WIDE
LT format:
LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST-R,
COMP, 13"LG, 8.5"SQ,
12" x 18" FULL
K format:
8K, 16K, 16K-R
(Non-Standard size)
Length: 100 - 297 mm,
Width: 148 - 432 mm
100 sheets (64 - 80 g/m2)
80 sheets (81 - 105 g/m2)
Thick 1
(106 - 163 g/m2)
40 sheets
Thick 2
(164 - 209 g/m2)
40 sheets *1
Thick 3
(210 - 256 g/m2)
30 sheets *1
Sticker labels *1, *2
Water proof paper 30 sheets
OHP film (Standard size)
A4 only
30 sheets *1
Preparation 2- Setting Copy Paper 55
Recommended paper
To make copies with a fine colour image, the following types of paper are recommended.
If you wish to use copy paper other than the recommended types, consult your service techni-
cian.
*1 Only Toshiba-recommended OHP film should be used. Using any other film may cause a malfunction.
Handling and storing paper
Pay attention to the following points:
yAvoid using paper that is specially treated or previously printed on another machine, and
also avoid performing double copying on the same side of the paper, since this may cause a
malfunction.
yDo not use paper with creases, wrinkles or curls, paper prone to curling, smooth or rough
paper; this may cause paper misfeeds.
yPaper should be wrapped in its wrapping and stored in a damp-free place.
yTo prevent paper from being folded or bent, store it evenly on a flat surface.
Paper type Toshiba recommendations/Manufacturer Mode
Plain paper ColourCopy/mondi 90 g/m2PLAIN
100 g/m2
Thick 120 g/m2THICK1
160 g/m2
200 g/m2THICK2
220 g/m2THICK3
250 g/m2
Sticker labels 3478/Zweckform-Avery - THICK2
Transparencies*1 BG72/FOLEX - TRANSPARENCY
Water proof paper Water Proof Paper Duplex/
TOMOEGAWA PAPER
230 g/m2SPECIAL1
AquaAce/Verbatim 230 g/m2SPECIAL2
1 BEFORE USING EQUIPMENT
56 Preparation 2- Setting Copy Paper
Setting copy paper (size change)
When you set or add copy paper in the drawer, follow the procedure below.
Placing paper in the drawer
1
Turn the power on.
2
Pull out the drawer carefully
until it comes to a stop.
3
Push the lower part of the end
guide in the direction of the
arrow to remove it, then rein-
stall it at the desired paper size
(indicated on the bottom inner
surface on the drawer).
4
Push the arrow part (right side)
of the side guide to unlock it.
Preparation 2- Setting Copy Paper 57
5
While pushing the green lever
of the side guide in the direc-
tion of the arrow, set the side
guide to the desired paper
size.
Adjust the side guides with both hands.
6
Push the arrow part (left side)
to lock the side guide.
1 BEFORE USING EQUIPMENT
58 Preparation 2- Setting Copy Paper
yPlace paper with its copy side up. (The copy side may be described on the wrapping
paper.)
yFor the maximum number of sheets that can be set, see P.54 “Acceptable copy
paper”.
yFan the paper well before placing it in the drawer.
yBe sure that the paper height does not exceed the line indicated inside of the guide.
yDo not use creased, folded, wrinkled or damp sheets of paper.
7
Place paper in the drawer(s).
Make sure that a gap of 0.5 mm (1.0 mm or less
in total) is left between the paper and the side
guide for plain paper, and approx. 0.5 mm to 1.0
mm (approx. 1.0 mm to 2.0 mm in total) for thick
paper. If the gap is insufficient, it could cause
paper misfeeding.
A
Preparation 2- Setting Copy Paper 59
8
Push the drawer straight into the equipment until it comes to a
stop.
Be sure to close the drawer securely and carefully.
Be careful not to let your fingers be caught when closing the drawer. This could injure
you.
10
When the paper size is different from the one in the drawer, press
the [YES] button. When the paper is the same size as the one in the
drawer, press the [NO] button. (When you press the [NO] button,
you do not need to continue with step 11 and subsequent steps.)
11
Press the paper size button corresponding to the paper that has
been set in the drawer.
9
When the paper size is differ-
ent from the one in the drawer,
change the paper size indica-
tor to match with the size of
paper which has been set.
1 BEFORE USING EQUIPMENT
60 Preparation 2- Setting Copy Paper
12
When you want to change the setting of the drawer for special uses
( P.62), press the paper type button.
13
Press the [ENTER] button.
Preparation 2- Setting Copy Paper 61
Changing the setting of paper size
If the setting of the paper size registered in the equipment does not correspond to the one in the
drawer, it could cause a paper jam. In this case, change the setting of the paper size according
to the following procedure.
2
Press the [USER] button on the touch panel to enter the user set-
ting menu and then press the [DRAWER] button.
3
Press the drawer on the touch panel corresponding to the one in
which the paper size has been set, and then press the button indi-
cating the new one.
1
Press the [USER FUNCTIONS]
button on the control panel.
1 BEFORE USING EQUIPMENT
62 Preparation 2- Setting Copy Paper
Drawer for special uses
When you set paper for special uses other than normal copying (e.g. sheets for cover copying)
in the drawer, you need to set this drawer for the special use in advance. If the drawer has been
set for a special use, its indication will change on the touch panel. A drawer with this setting will
not be used for normal copying except for copying with recycled paper.
The following paper types are selectable according to each purpose.
Setting the drawer for special uses
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
yPlace paper with its copy side up.
ySet the paper size as required. ( P.61 “Changing the setting of paper size”)
Paper type Purpose Indication Reference
Cover sheet Sheet used in the cover copying mode P.185 “COVER
SHEET”
Insertion sheet Sheet used in the sheet insertion mode
(Up to 2 drawers can be set for this mode.
First, set Insert source 1, then press the
drawer for the paper type of Insert source
2, and then press the [INSERT] button.)
(or
)
P.188 “SHEET
INSERTION”
FAX paper Fax paper (Fax Unit (optional) is required
for the Fax function.)
(See the manual of each
option.)
Special paper Special types of paper
(e.g. Paper with a watermark)
-
Thick 1 Sheet used when its weight is between
106g/m2 and 163g/m2. It can be set with
other paper types.
P.54 “Acceptable copy
paper”
Recycled paper It can be set with other paper types.
2
Press the [USER FUNCTIONS]
button on the control panel.
Preparation 2- Setting Copy Paper 63
3
Press the [USER] button on the touch panel to enter the user set-
ting menu, then press the [DRAWER] button.
4
Press the desired drawer and [MEDIA TYPE] button on the touch
panel.
5
Press the paper type button.
E.g.: When Thick paper 1 is set in the 1st drawer and used as a cover sheet
Press the [RETURN] button three times or the [COPY] button on the control panel to
return to the basic menu.
1 BEFORE USING EQUIPMENT
64 Preparation 2- Setting Copy Paper
Clearing the drawer for special uses
1
Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Setting the drawer for special uses”
( P. 6 2 ).
2
Press the drawer on the touch panel corresponding to the one
whose setting you want to clear, and then press the [MEDIA TYPE]
button.
3
Press the paper type button corresponding to the one placed in the
drawer you selected in step 1.
The paper type setting is cleared and the indication of drawer returns to the original state.
yWhen both Insertion sheet 1 and 2 have been set and only the setting of Insertion
sheet 1 is cleared, the drawer for Insertion sheet 2 changes to the one for Insertion
sheet 1.
yThe paper type set in the drawer can be checked with the indication of drawer on the
basic menu.
Preparation 2- Setting Copy Paper 65
Placing paper in the Large Capacity Feeder (optional)
yPlace paper with its copy side up. (The copy side may be described on the wrapping
paper.)
yFor the maximum number of sheets that can be set, see P.54 “Acceptable copy
paper”.
yBe sure that the paper height does not exceed the line indicated on the side guide.
yFan and jog the paper well before placing it on the drawer. Set the paper for A to the
right side, and set that for B to the left side. (The paper can be set neatly if you pile it
up gradually and alternately in A and B.) Be sure that the centre lever is not open
(see the labels attached in the Large Capacity Feeder).
yPaper starts being fed out of the elevator tray (A) at first. When the paper on A has
run out, the paper on B moves to the position of A and starts being fed.
yDo not use wrinkled, folded or damp sheets of paper.
3
Push the drawer of the Large Capacity Feeder straight into the
equipment until it comes to a stop.
Close the drawer completely. The elevator tray automatically moves up to the paper
feeding position.
Be careful not to let your fingers be caught when closing the drawer. This could injure
you.
4
To change the paper type, see P.61 “Changing the setting of
paper size”.
1
Pull out the Large Capacity
Feeder carefully.
Pull out the drawer until it comes to a
stop.
2
Place paper in A and B.
A
B
1 BEFORE USING EQUIPMENT
66 Preparation 2- Setting Copy Paper
2.HOW TO MAKE COPIES
This chapter explains the basic copying procedures.
Setting Originals .....................................................................................................68
Acceptable originals ..........................................................................................................................68
Placing originals on the glass............................................................................................................70
Using the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (optional) ...........................................................72
Making Copies.........................................................................................................76
Initial (Default) settings......................................................................................................................76
Copying procedure............................................................................................................................77
Scanning the next originals during copying (Auto job start) ..............................................................82
Interrupt copying in progress and make other copies (Interrupt copying).........................................84
Bypass Copying......................................................................................................85
Bypass copying.................................................................................................................................85
Bypass copying on standard size paper............................................................................................86
Bypass copying on non-standard size paper ....................................................................................91
Proof Copy...............................................................................................................95
2 HOW TO MAKE COPIES
68 Setting Originals
Setting Originals
Acceptable originals
Acceptable originals are as follows.
*1 Do not place any heavy objects (4 kg or over) on the glass.
*2 Some originals cannot be used depending on their paper quality.
*3 Be sure to place A5-size originals in the landscape direction.
Automatic size detection does not work properly when LT or K format paper is used for printing.
(LT format is a standard paper size for North America.) (K format is a standard paper size for
China.)
yOriginals up to 100 sheets (35 to 80 g/m2) or 16 mm in height can be placed on the Revers-
ing Automatic Document Feeder (optional), regardless of their sizes.
yWhen you copy a large number of landscape originals using the Reversing Automatic Docu-
ment Feeder (optional), use the original stopper to prevent them from being scattered.
Setting position Type of original Maximum
size
Acceptable sizes for automatic
size detection
Original glass *1 Sheets
3-dimensional
object
Books
Length: 297 mm
Width: 432 mm
(Standard size)
A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R
Reversing Automatic
Document Feeder
(optional)
*2 *3
Plain paper
Recycled paper
1-sided originals:
35 - 157 g/m2
2-sided originals:
50 - 157 g/m2
Length: 297 mm
Width: 432 mm
(Standard size)
A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R,
FOLIO
Setting Originals 69
Maximum number of sheets for scanning
A maximum of 1000 A4 sheets, or up until the memory becomes full can be accepted per 1 copy
job.
When the number of scanned sheets has exceeded the above limit, a message “The number of
originals exceeds the limits. Will you copy stored originals?” appears. If you want to print out the
data of originals stored (scanned) up till then, press the [YES] button on the touch panel. If you
want to delete the stored data, press the [NO] button.
2 HOW TO MAKE COPIES
70 Setting Originals
Placing originals on the glass
Sheet originals
Do not place heavy objects (4 kg or more) on the original glass and do not press on it with force.
Breaking the glass could injure you.
1
Raise the original cover or Reversing Automatic Document Feeder
(optional).
Raise it 60 degrees or more for detecting the original.
2
Place the original with its face
down on the original glass and
align it against the left rear cor-
ner of the glass.
A: Original
3
Lower the original cover or
Reversing Automatic Docu-
ment Feeder (optional) care-
fully.
yWhen you want to copy originals with
high transparency such as OHP films
or tracing paper, place a blank sheet
of paper, the same size as the origi-
nal or larger, over the original.
A: Original
B: Blank sheet
A
A
B
Setting Originals 71
Book-type originals
Do not place heavy objects (4 kg or more) on the original glass and do not press on it with force.
Breaking the glass could injure you.
1
Raise the original cover or Reversing Automatic Document Feeder
(optional).
3
Lower the original cover or Reversing Automatic Document Feeder
(optional) carefully.
yDo not lower the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder forcibly when the original is
very thick. There will be no problem in copying even if the Reversing Automatic Doc-
ument Feeder is not fully lowered.
yDo not look fully at the original glass because intensive light may leak out during
copying.
2
Open the desired page of the
original and place it face down.
Align it against the left rear
corner of the glass.
yWhen you want to use the 2-sided
copying function or the dual-page
function on the book-type originals,
align the centre of the original on the
yellow indicator line of the glass.
( P.134 “Book-type original -> 2-
sided copy”)
( P.171 “DUAL PAGE”)
2 HOW TO MAKE COPIES
72 Setting Originals
Using the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (optional)
Precautions
Do not use the types of original 1 to 8 shown below because such types may
cause misfeeding or damage to the equipment.
1. Badly wrinkled, folded or curled originals
2. Original with carbon paper
3. Taped, pasted or cut-out originals
4. Clipped or stapled originals
5. Originals with holes or tears
6. Damp originals
7. OHP films or tracing paper
8. Coating paper (coated with wax, etc.)
Use types of original 9 and 10 shown below with extra care.
9. Originals which cannot be moved with the fingers, or surface-treated originals
(The sheets of such originals may not be able to be separated.)
10. Folded or curled originals should be smoothed out before being used.
If the scanning area or the guide area is dirty, image trouble such as black streaks may occur in
the printout. Weekly cleaning of these areas is recommended. ( P.392 “Daily Inspection”)
132
5 6
78
4
910
Setting Originals 73
Continuous feed mode
When the number of originals is too large to be set at one time, you can previously divide
the originals into several sets to copy them continuously. To do so, place the first set of
the originals and press the [CONTINUE] button on the touch panel while the data of this
set are being scanned. When this scanning has finished, set the next set of the originals
and press the [START] button on the control panel.
1
Align all the originals. Then
place them face up and align
the side guides to the original
length.
yPlace the originals straight along the
side guides.
yCollate the originals in the order that
you want them to be copied. The top
sheet of the originals will be fed first.
yThis mode is also available for one-
sheet originals.
yRegardless of their sizes, originals
are acceptable up to 100 sheets (35
to 80 g/m2) or 16 mm in height.
yFor mixed-size originals, see
P.101 “Copying mixed-sized originals
in one operation (mixed original
size)”.
yUse the original stopper as required.
yTo replace the original stopper, lift it
slightly and push it in.
2 HOW TO MAKE COPIES
74 Setting Originals
Single feed mode
To switch over between the continuous feed mode and the single feed mode, see P.201
“ADF / SADF”.
The original will be pulled in automatically. Be sure to let go of it when it starts being
pulled.
3
If there are more originals, set them in the same way.
The same operation is performed whether or not you press the [YES] button.
1
Align the side guides to the
original width.
2
Insert the original with its face
up and straight along the side
guides.
The menu of step 3 will be displayed.
Setting Originals 75
4
After all originals have finished being fed, press the [FINISHED]
button.
If the [FINISHED] button is not pressed, copying is started when the automatic function
clear is operated.
P.43 “Clearing functions selected
2 HOW TO MAKE COPIES
76 Making Copies
Making Copies
Initial (Default) settings
When the power is turned on, when the energy saving mode is cleared, and when the [FUNC-
TION CLEAR] button on the control panel is pressed, various setting items are automatically set.
These items are called the initial (default) settings. Set originals after placing paper or confirming
that there is paper in the drawers. When the [START] button on the control panel is pressed with
any of the settings unchanged, copies are made in the initial (default) settings. You can make
copies as desired by setting various copy modes.
The table below lists the various items of the initial settings at the time of installation of this
equipment.
These initial settings can be changed as desired. See the User Functions Guide for details.
Item Initial (Default) setting
Reproduction ratio 100%
Copy quantity 1
Paper selection Automatic Paper Selection (APS)
Original -> Copy 1-Sided -> 1-Sided
Density adjustment Manual copy density adjustment
Colour mode FULL COLOUR
Original mode TEXT/PHOTO
Finishing mode Placing originals on the original glass: Non-sort/
Non-staple mode
Placing originals on the Reversing Automatic Doc-
ument Feeder (optional): Sort mode
Feeding mode when originals are placed on the
Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (optional)
Continuous feed mode
Making Copies 77
Copying procedure
Placing originals on the Reversing Automatic Document
Feeder (optional)
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
For the types and sizes of paper selectable, see P.54 “Acceptable copy paper”.
When the desired size or type of paper is not in any of the drawers or the Large Capacity
Feeder, see the following pages.
P.56 “Setting copy paper (size change)”
P.65 “Placing paper in the Large Capacity Feeder (optional)”
P.85 “Bypass Copying”
2
Place the original(s).
See the following pages to set the
originals.
P.68 “Acceptable originals”
P.72 “Using the Reversing Automatic
Document Feeder (optional)”
The originals are copied in the order of
being scanned.
2 HOW TO MAKE COPIES
78 Making Copies
3
Select the copy modes as required. When you want to copy more
than one set, key in the desired number of copies.
yPress the [CLEAR] button on the control panel to correct the number keyed in.
yNote that some combinations of copy modes are restricted. ( P.407 “Copying Func-
tion Combination Matrix”, P.409 “Image Quality Adjustment Combination Matrix”)
yOnce the [START] button on the control panel is pressed, any change in copy modes
(including setting of the previously divided sets of originals) cannot be applied after-
ward.
4
Press the [START] button.
yCopying starts. The paper exits with
its copied side down.
yWhen the drawer runs out of paper
during copying, the corresponding
drawer on the touch panel and the
[JOB STATUS] button on the control
panel blink. Add paper to this drawer
or select another one with the same
paper size.
yBe careful because the paper exit
area and paper just after exiting are
hot.
Making Copies 79
Placing an original on the original glass
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
For the types and sizes of paper selectable, see P.54 “Acceptable copy paper”.
When the desired size or type of paper is not in any of the drawers or the Large Capacity
Feeder, see the following pages.
P.56 “Setting copy paper (size change)”
P.72 “Using the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (optional)
P.85 “Bypass Copying”
2
Place the original(s).
See the following pages to set the originals.
P.68 “Acceptable originals”
P.70 “Placing originals on the glass”
The originals are copied in the order of being scanned.
3
Select the copy modes as required. When you want to copy more
than one set, key in the desired number of copies.
yPress the [CLEAR] button on the control panel to correct the number keyed in.
yNote that some combinations of copy modes are restricted. ( P.407 “Copying Func-
tion Combination Matrix”, P.409 “Image Quality Adjustment Combination Matrix”)
yOnce the [START] button on the control panel is pressed, any change in copy modes
(including setting of the previously divided sets of originals) cannot be applied after-
ward.
2 HOW TO MAKE COPIES
80 Making Copies
When you copy by placing originals on the original glass (e.g. using the sort mode, or
making 1-sided original 2-sided copies), the data of these originals are scanned into the
memory. In this case, proceed to steps 5 and 6.
5
Place the next original, and press the [START] button.
yData scanning of this original starts.
yThe next original will also be scanned in the same manner when you press the [YES]
button on the touch panel and then press the [START] button on the control panel.
yRepeat the above procedure until the scanning of the last page of the original fin-
ishes.
6
When scanning of all pages has finished, press the [FINISHED] but-
ton on the touch panel.
Copying starts. The paper exits with its copied side down.
yWhen the drawer runs out of paper during copying, the corresponding drawer on the
touch panel and the [JOB STATUS] button on the control panel blink. Add paper to
this drawer or select another one with the same paper size.
yBe careful because the paper exit area and paper just after exiting are hot.
4
Press the [START] button.
Copying starts.
Making Copies 81
Stopping the copying operation
Press the [STOP] button on the control panel to stop scanning or continuous copying.
2
When the following menu is displayed, press the [MEMORY
CLEAR] button on the touch panel.
yIf there is any copy job waiting, this job will start.
yDuring scanning: The data scanned up to then are deleted.
yDuring continuous copying: Copying stops and the data scanned up to then are
deleted.
1
Press the [STOP] button on the
control panel during scanning
(or continuous copying).
2 HOW TO MAKE COPIES
82 Making Copies
Scanning the next originals during copying (Auto job start)
You can reserve a copy job by scanning the original during continuous copying or while “READY
(WARMING UP)” appears.
1
Place the original(s).
2
Select the copy mode and set the number of copies.
Note that the job starts in the copy modes of the previous job unless you set new ones
particularly for this job.
yUp to 10 jobs can be stored in the memory. When an 11th job is placed on the original
glass or the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (optional) and the [START] but-
ton is pressed, “Auto Start” appears on the touch panel.
yA maximum of 1000 LT sheets, or up until the memory becomes full can be accepted
per 1 copy job. ( P.69 “Maximum number of sheets for scanning”)
3
Press the [START] button on
the control panel.
Making Copies 83
Confirming and cancelling auto job
Confirming auto job and cancelling job in waiting
Press the [JOB STATUS] button on the control panel to display the job list for confirming the set
auto job and cancelling a job waiting to be copied. To cancel auto jobs, see P.276 “Deleting
print jobs”.
Cancelling auto job
Press the [STOP] button on the control panel to stop a job while originals are being scanned. To
restart the job, press the [START] button. To clear the job, press the [FUNCTION CLEAR] but-
ton. (However, the originals which have been scanned before the job is stopped are copied even
though the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button is pressed.)
To cancel the 11th auto job, press the [STOP] button.
2 HOW TO MAKE COPIES
84 Making Copies
Interrupt copying in progress and make other copies (Interrupt
copying)
While continuous copying is in progress, you can interrupt this job with another copy job. The fol-
lowing features cannot be used together with interrupt copying:
yCover sheet copying
ySheet insertion copying
yStore to e-Filing / Copy & File
yJob build
y[e-FILING]/[SCAN]/[FAX] buttons
When the [INTERRUPT] button is pressed while originals are being scanned, the
[INTERRUPT] button blinks first. Then the button lights after “Job interrupted job 1 saved”
appears when the scanning is finished.
2
Replace the original with a new one.
Set other copy modes as required.
3
Press the [START] button on the control panel.
4
After you have finished the interrupt copying, press the [INTER-
RUPT] button again.
The message “READY to resume job 1” appears and the interrupted job resumes.
Interrupt copying is automatically cancelled after a certain period by automatic function
clearing without the need to press the [INTERRUPT] button again. The interrupted job (=
Job 1) resumes after this automatic function clearing.
1
Press the [INTERRUPT] but-
ton on the control panel.
The [INTERRUPT] button blinks first,
then lights after “Job interrupted job 1
saved” appears.
Bypass Copying 85
Bypass Copying
Bypass copying
When you want to make copies on OHP film, sticker labels, or non-standard size paper, place
the sheets of paper on the bypass tray. Bypass copying is also recommended for copying on
standard size paper which is not in any of the drawers.
If you select the paper size, you can utilize various functions such as the automatic paper selec-
tion (APS) or the automatic magnification selection (AMS). For the details, see P.407 “Copy-
ing Function Combination Matrix”.
To carry out bypass copying, open the bypass tray.
The operating procedure of bypass copying differs depending on the paper size used. See the
corresponding page for the operating procedure of each size. The table below shows these
pages.
yBypass copying stops when the paper placed on the bypass tray runs out during copying,
even if the same size paper is in any of the drawers. Copying is resumed when paper is sup-
plied to the bypass tray.
yWhen bypass copying has completed, the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button on the control panel
blinks. Press this button to switch it to default copying using the drawers. (Bypass copying is
automatically cancelled after a certain period by automatic function clearing without the need
to press the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button. The bypass copying returns to default copying
using the drawers after this automatic function clearing.)
Paper size Procedure
Standard size A3, A4, B4, B5 P. 8 6
Other than the above P. 8 9
Others (Non-standard size) P. 9 1
2 HOW TO MAKE COPIES
86 Bypass Copying
Bypass copying on standard size paper
Copying on A3, A4, B4 and B5 size paper
yRear side of the side guides of the bypass tray has an indicator for paper height. The
height of the sheets must not exceed this indicator.
yWhen you use more than one sheet, fan the sheets well before setting them on the
tray.
yDo not push the sheets into the entrance of the bypass feeder; this may cause a
paper jam.
yWhen the paper size is larger, draw out the three-stage paper holder. Raise B when
you use A3 or a larger size of paper.
2
Place the original(s).
1
Place some sheets of paper
with their copy side down on
the bypass tray. Align the side
guides to the paper length
while holding A.
The message “Ready for bypass
feeding” appears.
A
B
Bypass Copying 87
3
Press the button of the same size as the one of the paper you have
set on the tray.
If the paper size is not specified here, copying may be slowed down.
4
Press the [MEDIA TYPE] button on the touch panel if the media type
of the paper you have set on the tray is other than plain paper.
5
Press the button of the same media type as the one of the paper
you have set on the tray, and then press the [ENTER] button on the
touch panel.
ySet other copy modes as required.
yIf a media type which is not same as the one you have set is selected here, this may
cause a paper jam or significant image trouble.
2 HOW TO MAKE COPIES
88 Bypass Copying
yWhen you want to make 1-sided copies on THICK2, THICK3, SPECIAL1 or
SPECIAL2 paper, select (FRONT) for the paper. To make 2-sided copies on this
paper, first select (FRONT) for copying on the one side and then select (BACK) on
the other side. Be sure to select (FRONT) and (BACK) correctly to make copies with
the optimal image quality.
yThe paper type which has been set can be confirmed with the touch panel.
6
Press the [START] button on the control panel.
When you copy on OHP films, remove the copied OHP films, which have exited on to the
receiving tray one by one. When the films pile up, they may become curled and may not
be projected properly.
e.g.: When making a 2-sided copy on a THICK3 paper
1. Place a sheet of THICK3 paper on the bypass tray.
2. Select THICK3 (FRONT) and make a 1-sided copy.
3. Place the paper copied at step 2 on the bypass tray again with its blank side
face down.
If you place the paper on the bypass tray with its top to bottom direction
unchanged, the original is copied in 'open to left', and if you place it with its top
to bottom direction changed, the original is copied in 'open to top'.
4. Select THICK3 (BACK) and make a copy.
- When you want to make 2-sided copies on PLAIN, RECYCLED PAPER or
THICK1, use the Automatic Duplexing Unit of the equipment.
- OHP films cannot be copied 2-sided.
PLAIN -- TRANSPARENCY
THICK1 RECYCLED PAPER
THICK2 (FRONT) SPECIAL1 (FRONT)
THICK2 (BACK) SPECIAL1 (BACK)
THICK3 (FRONT) SPECIAL2 (FRONT)
THICK3 (BACK) SPECIAL2 (BACK)
Bypass Copying 89
Copying on standard size paper other than A3, A4, B4
and B5
1
Place paper and original(s) by following step 1 and 2 in “Copying
on A3, A4, B4 and B5 size paper” ( P.86).
2
Press the [OTHER SIZE] button on the touch panel.
3
Press the button of the same size as the one of the paper you have
set on the tray.
4
Press the [OTHER] button for the copy size.
If the paper size is not specified here, copying may be slowed down.
2 HOW TO MAKE COPIES
90 Bypass Copying
5
Press the [MEDIA TYPE] button on the touch panel if the media type
of the paper you have set on the tray is other than plain paper.
6
Press the button of the same media type as the one of the paper
you have set on the tray, and then press the [ENTER] button on the
touch panel.
E.g.: When Thick paper 1 is set
Set other copy modes as required.
yIf a media type which is not same as the one you have set is selected here, this may
cause a paper jam or significant image trouble.
yIf the paper size is not specified here, some operations such as cleaning may slow
down the copying.
The paper type which has been set can be confirmed with the touch panel. See the table
in P.86 “Bypass copying on standard size paper”.
7
Press the [START] button on the control panel.
When you copy on OHP films, remove the copied OHP films, which have exited on to the
receiving tray one by one. When the films pile up, they may become curled and may not
be projected properly.
Bypass Copying 91
Bypass copying on non-standard size paper
Non-standard size paper should be within the following ranges: A (Length): 100 to 297 mm, B
(Width): 148 to 432 mm
yRear side of the side guides of the bypass tray has an indicator for paper height. The
height of the sheets must not exceed this indicator.
yWhen you use more than one sheet, fan the sheets well before setting them on the
tray.
yDo not push the sheets into the entrance of the bypass feeder; it may cause a paper
jam.
yWhen the paper size is larger, draw out the three-stage paper holder. Raise B when
you use A3 or a larger size of paper.
2
Place the original on the original glass.
1
Place some sheets of paper
with their copy side down on
the bypass tray. Align the side
guides to the paper length
while holding A.
The message “Ready for bypass
feeding” appears.
A
B
A
B
2 HOW TO MAKE COPIES
92 Bypass Copying
3
Press the [NON STANDARD] button on the touch panel.
4
Set each dimension following
the procedure below.
The [Length] and [Width] are indicated
as follows:
A: [Length]
B: [Width]
Using the digital keys
Key in the value in [Length] and press the [SET] button on the touch panel. Set the
width in the same way and press the [ENTER] button.
AB
Bypass Copying 93
5
Press the [START] button on the control panel.
Recalling dimensions registered in the memory
Press the desired memory number button from [MEMORY 1] to [MEMORY 4] to recall
the dimension data registered previously, and then press the [ENTER] button.
ySet other copy modes as required.
yPaper size that can be set is as follows:
Length: 100 mm to 297 mm
Width: 148 mm to 432 mm
yTo register the dimension data in the memory, see P.94 “Registering non-stan-
dard size in the memory”.
2 HOW TO MAKE COPIES
94 Bypass Copying
Registering non-standard size in the memory
1
Follow steps 1 to 3 on “Bypass copying on non-standard size
paper” ( P. 9 1 ) .
2
Press the memory number button (from [MEMORY 1] to [MEMORY
4]) you want to register the dimension.
3
Key in each dimension, and press the [MEMORY] button on the
touch panel.
yKey in its length in [Length] and press the [SET] button on the touch panel. Set its
width in the same manner.
yPaper size that can be set is as follows:
Length: 100 mm to 297 mm
Width: 148 mm to 432 mm
Proof Copy 95
Proof Copy
This function allows you to check that the copy density, zoom and margin width, etc. are properly
set by making only one set of copies.
You can prevent miscopying by using this function before committing yourself to mass-copying.
yThe setting of the number of copy sets, page number, time stamp, sort/stapling (when the
optional Finisher has been installed) and hole punch (when the optional Hole Punch Unit has
been installed) can be changed after having made the proof copy.
yPress the [MEMORY CLEAR] button to clear the proof copy before changing the setting of
the zoom or copy density, etc. When you make copies again after changing the settings, the
data of the originals need to be scanned.
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Place the original(s).
3
Select the copy modes as required.
4
Press the [PROOF COPY] button.
y“PROOF COPY is set Press START button to copy” appears. (for approx. 2 sec.)
yIf “NON-SORT/NON-STAPLE” or “GROUP” is set as the finishing mode, the setting
will be changed to “SORT” automatically.
5
Press the [START] button.
The data scanning of the originals is
started and one set of copies is made.
2 HOW TO MAKE COPIES
96 Proof Copy
6
Change the settings as required.
yThe setting of the number of copy sets, page number, time stamp, sort/stapling (when
the optional Finisher has been installed) and hole punch (when the optional Hole
Punch Unit has been installed) can be changed.
yIf you want to change the setting of the copy density, original mode, zoom or simplex/
duplex, press the [MEMORY CLEAR] button to clear the proof copy. After the change,
perform the instructions from step 1 again.
7
Press the [START] button.
If the number of copy sets is not changed in step 6, one less than the previously specified
number is copied. However, if “1” is specified for the number of copy sets, one set of
copies is made.
3.SETTING OF BASIC COPY MODES
This chapter describes the basic useful copying functions including Enlargement and Reduction Copying,
Selecting Finishing Modes, Duplex Copying and such.
Paper Selection.......................................................................................................98
Automatic Paper Selection (APS) .....................................................................................................98
Manual paper selection...................................................................................................................100
Copying mixed-sized originals in one operation (mixed original size).............................................101
Switching Colour Mode ........................................................................................103
Enlargement and Reduction Copying.................................................................104
Automatic Magnification Selection (AMS).......................................................................................104
Specifying both original size and copy size separately ...................................................................106
Using the zoom buttons or the one-touch zoom buttons.................................................................108
Copying photo originals in the best reproduction ratio for copy paper size..................................... 110
Selecting Finishing Modes...................................................................................114
Type of finishing mode .................................................................................................................... 114
Name of each part in the Finisher (optional) ...................................................................................115
Sort/Group copying ......................................................................................................................... 116
Rotate sort mode............................................................................................................................. 118
Staple sort mode .............................................................................................................................120
Magazine sort & saddle stitch mode (booklet mode) ......................................................................122
Hole punch mode (optional) ............................................................................................................125
Manual stapling (MJ-1101 only) ......................................................................................................127
Duplex Copying.....................................................................................................129
1-sided original -> 1-sided copy (default setting at installation) ......................................................130
1-sided original -> 2-sided copy ......................................................................................................131
2-sided original -> 2-sided copy ......................................................................................................132
2-sided original -> 1-sided copy ......................................................................................................133
Book-type original -> 2-sided copy..................................................................................................134
Original Mode ........................................................................................................138
Copy Density Adjustment ....................................................................................140
Automatic copy density mode .........................................................................................................140
Manual copy density mode .............................................................................................................141
3 SETTING OF BASIC COPY MODES
98 Paper Selection
Paper Selection
Automatic Paper Selection (APS)
When you place standard size originals on the original glass or the Reversing Automatic Docu-
ment Feeder (optional), the size of the originals is automatically detected, which helps the equip-
ment select paper that is the same size as the originals.
yThe automatic paper selection may not work correctly depending on the type of the originals.
In that case, select the paper size manually.( P.100 “Manual paper selection”)
yFor original sizes available for automatic paper selection, see P.68 “Acceptable originals”.
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Place the original(s).
3
Confirm that automatic paper selection has been selected on the
basic menu.
yAutomatic paper selection is selected by default at the installation of the equipment.
yIf “Change direction of original” or “CHANGE DRAWER TO CORRECT PAPER SIZE”
appears, perform the action accordingly.
ySet other copy modes as required.
Even if the direction of the paper set in the selected drawer differs from that of the origi-
nal, the equipment rotates the data of the original by 90 degrees to make copies as long
as their sizes are the same. (This works on A4 paper only.) For example, when an A4
original is set in a portrait direction and A4-R paper is placed in the drawer, the data of A4
original will be rotated and copied correctly on A4-R paper.
Paper Selection 99
When automatic paper selection is not selected
(1) Press the Enlargement/Reduction ([ZOOM...]) button.
(2) Press the [APS] button.
4
Press the [START] button.
3 SETTING OF BASIC COPY MODES
100 Paper Selection
Manual paper selection
Automatic paper selection cannot be selected for the following originals because their sizes are
not detected correctly. Select the paper size manually for these originals.
yHighly transparent originals (e.g. OHP film, tracing paper)
yWholly dark originals or originals with dark borders
yNon-standard size originals (e.g. newspapers, magazines)
When the desired size of paper is not set in any of the drawers, place this size of paper in the
selected drawer or place the paper on the bypass tray manually.
( P.56 “Placing paper in the drawer”, P.85 “Bypass Copying”)
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
When using the bypass tray, be sure to specify the paper size.
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the drawer button representing the desired paper size on the
touch panel.
yYou can use the paper source selection ( / ) buttons to select the desired drawer.
ySet other copy modes as required.
4
Press the [START] button.
Paper Selection 101
Copying mixed-sized originals in one operation (mixed original size)
You can copy a set of originals whose sizes are individually different, using the Reversing Auto-
matic Document Feeder (optional), by pressing the [MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE] button.
yThis mixed original size setting is available only in the following combinations.
A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, FOLIO
yNote that the copied image may become skewed depending on the combination of originals.
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
Bypass copying is not available.
3
Press the Enlargement/Reduction ([ZOOM...]) button to enter the
setting menu of the original or paper size.
2
Adjust the side guides to the
widest original, and then align
the original against the guide
at the front side.
Place the originals face up.
3 SETTING OF BASIC COPY MODES
102 Paper Selection
4
Press the [MIXED ORIGINAL SIZES] button.
5
Select either automatic paper selection (APS) or automatic magnifi-
cation selection (AMS).
Automatic paper selection: Copies on the same size of paper as that of originals
( P. 9 8 ) .
Automatic magnification selection: Copies all in one size ( P.104).
yBefore you use automatic paper selection, be sure that all paper sizes corresponding
to the original sizes have been set in the drawers.
yIn automatic magnification selection, the copies cannot be enlarged from A4 (por-
trait)/ B5 (portrait) to A3 (landscape)/B4 (landscape).
yIf “Change direction of original” appears when [AMS] is used with [MIXED ORIGINAL
SIZES], change the direction according to the message.
ySet other copy modes as required.
6
Press the [START] button.
Switching Colour Mode 103
Switching Colour Mode
This function allows you to switch colour modes. There are three types of colour modes as fol-
lows:
FULL COLOUR: All originals are copied in full colour regardless of the type of each original.
BLACK: All originals are copied in black regardless of the type of each original. (Default
setting)
AUTO COLOUR:The equipment automatically judges the type of each original. Coloured origi-
nals are copied in full colour and black-and-white originals are copied in black.
1
Press the [FULL COLOUR], [BLACK] or [AUTO COLOUR] button.
When you use “AUTO COLOUR”, note the following points:
When the coloured area in an original is extremely small, when the colours of the original
are close to black, or when the colours of an original are too light, these originals may be
automatically copied in black even though they are coloured. Also yellowed originals or
originals with a coloured background may be automatically copied in full colour even
though they are black-and-white. Select the full colour mode or the black mode depend-
ing on the state of the original to reproduce exact colours.
3 SETTING OF BASIC COPY MODES
104 Enlargement and Reduction Copying
Enlargement and Reduction Copying
You can enlarge or reduce the size of copies by means of the following procedures.
ySpecifying the copy paper size in advance so that the equipment will detect the original size
and automatically select the most appropriate reproduction ratio for the copy paper size (=
automatic magnification selection)
ySpecifying both original size and copy paper size separately
yUsing the zoom buttons or the one-touch zoom buttons
yCopying photo originals in the best reproduction ratio for copy paper size (photo zoom)
The enlargement/reduction ratio available differs depending on whether the originals have been
set on the original glass or on the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (optional).
On the original glass: 25 to 400%
On the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder: 25 to 200%
Automatic Magnification Selection (AMS)
yThe automatic magnification selection cannot be selected for the following originals. Set their
reproduction ratios in other ways.
- Highly transparent originals (e.g. OHP film, tracing paper)
- Wholly dark originals or originals with dark borders
- Non-standard size originals (e.g. newspapers, magazines)
yFor the original sizes available for this automatic magnification selection, see P.6 8
“Acceptable originals”.
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Press the Enlargement/Reduction ([ZOOM...]) button.
Enlargement and Reduction Copying 105
3
Press the button representing the desired copy paper size.
E.g.: When A4-size paper is selected
The copy paper size can also be set by pressing the drawer button on the touch panel.
4
Press the [AMS] button.
5
Place the original(s).
yIf “Change direction of original” appears, make the change accordingly.
ySet other copy modes as required.
yIn Rotate Sort mode all copies are delivered to the receiving tray.
6
Press the [START] button.
3 SETTING OF BASIC COPY MODES
106 Enlargement and Reduction Copying
Specifying both original size and copy size separately
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the Enlargement/Reduction ([ZOOM...]) button.
4
Specify the original size and copy paper size.
Original size: Press the size button representing the same size as that of the set orig-
inal.
Copy paper size: Press the size button representing the desired copy paper size.
E.g.: When A3 for the original size and A4 for the copy paper size are selected
yThe copy paper size can also be set by pressing the drawer button on the touch
panel.
yWhen the original size and copy paper size have been specified, the enlargement/
reduction ratio is computed and displayed on the touch panel.
ySet other copy modes as required.
When the original or copy paper is a standard size other than A3, A4, B4 or B5, you need
to register this paper size in the selections of the [OTHER] button in advance. See “When
a standard size paper other than A3, A4, B4 and B5 is set” below for the registration.
5
Press the [START] button.
Enlargement and Reduction Copying 107
When a standard size paper other than A3, A4, B4 and B5 is set
Register the size of the placed paper to the [OTHER] button with the following procedure. The
registered paper size is automatically selected when the [OTHER] button is pressed.
1
Press the [OTHER SIZE] button.
2
Press the paper size button corresponding to the paper that has
been set.
E.g.: When FOLIO-size paper is set
3
Press the [OTHER] button.
3 SETTING OF BASIC COPY MODES
108 Enlargement and Reduction Copying
Using the zoom buttons or the one-touch zoom buttons
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the Enlargement/Reduction ([ZOOM...]) button.
4
Press the following buttons to set the desired reproduction ratio.
A: Zoom ( / ) buttons
The reproduction ratio changes by 1% every time it is pressed. When you hold down
either of them, the ratio goes up or down automatically.
B: One-touch zoom buttons
You can select the ratio from [400%], [200%], [100%], [50%] and [25%].
The maximum ratio when the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (optional) is used
is 200%.
B
A
Enlargement and Reduction Copying 109
5
Press the button representing the desired copy paper size.
E.g.: When A3-size paper is selected
yThe copy paper size can also be set by pressing the drawer button on the touch
panel.
ySet other copy modes as required.
6
Press the [START] button.
3 SETTING OF BASIC COPY MODES
110 Enlargement and Reduction Copying
Copying photo originals in the best reproduction ratio for copy paper
size
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Place the original on the original glass.
Place the original in a landscape direction.
3
Press the Enlargement/Reduction ([Zoom…]) button.
4
Press the [PHOTO ZOOM] button.
Enlargement and Reduction Copying 111
5
Specify the original size.
The size can be selected from “9x13 cm”, “10x15 cm”, “13x18 cm” and “20x30 cm”.
E.g.: When placing 9x13 cm photo original
If the original size is other than “9x13 cm”, “10x15 cm”, “13x18 cm” or “20x30 cm”, key in
the horizontal and vertical sizes of the original manually. For how to key them in, see
“When placing photo originals in other sizes”.
6
Specify the copy paper size.
E.g.: When selecting A4-R paper
yWhen you specify original size and copy paper size, the enlargement or reduction
ratio is automatically calculated and displayed on the menu.
yIf the copy paper size is a standard size other than A4-R, A3, B4 or A5-R, you need to
register the size to the [OTHER] button in advance. For how to register it, see
P.107 “When a standard size paper other than A3, A4, B4 and B5 is set”.
3 SETTING OF BASIC COPY MODES
112 Enlargement and Reduction Copying
7
Press the [ENTER] button.
ySelect other copy modes as required.
8
Press the [START] button.
yIf the finishing mode is “Non-sort / Non-staple”, the original will be scanned and copy-
ing will start. If not, proceed to steps 9 and 10.
9
Place the next original, and press the [START] button.
yData scanning of this original starts.
yThe next original will also be scanned in the same manner when you press the [YES]
button on the touch panel and then press the [START] button on the control panel.
yRepeat the above procedure until the scanning of the last page of the original fin-
ishes.
10
When scanning of all pages has finished, press the [FINISHED] but-
ton on the touch panel.
Copying starts.
When placing photo originals in other sizes
1
Press the [CUSTOM] button.
Enlargement and Reduction Copying 113
2
Key in the original size.
Key in the value of the width (X) of the original, and then press the [SET] button. Then
key in its length (Y). Acceptable ranges are as follows:
Width (X): 10 to 434 mm
Length (Y): 10 to 300 mm
3
Press the [ENTER] button.
3 SETTING OF BASIC COPY MODES
114 Selecting Finishing Modes
Selecting Finishing Modes
Type of finishing mode
The available finishing modes differ depending on the type of finishing device installed
(MJ-1030, MJ-1101, MJ-6004 or MJ-6101). Check the available finishing modes with the table
below.
Yes: Available
No: Not available
MJ-1030: Saddle Stitch Finisher
MJ-1101: Finisher
MJ-6004: Hole Punch Unit (for MJ-1030)
MJ-6101: Hole Punch Unit (for MJ-1101)
Finishing
device
Type of finishing mode
Sort/
Group
Rotate
sort
Staple
sort
Maga-
zine sort
Maga-
zine sort
& Saddle
stitch
Saddle
stitch
Hole
punch
MJ-1030 +
MJ-6004 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
MJ-1030 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
MJ-1101 +
MJ-6101 Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes
MJ-1101 Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No
No finishing
device Yes Yes No Yes No No No
Selecting Finishing Modes 115
Name of each part in the Finisher (optional)
1. Tray
2. Sub-tray
3. Upper cover
4. Front cover
5. Hole Punch Unit (MJ-6101)
6. Hole Punch Unit (MJ-6004)
7. Saddle stitch tray
8. Fixed tray
3
8
2
2
1
2
1
1
6
5
4
4
7
MJ-1030MJ-1101
3 SETTING OF BASIC COPY MODES
116 Selecting Finishing Modes
Sort/Group copying
To make multiple copies, select the sort mode or the group mode as required.
(Example of making 5 sets of copies from 5 original sheets)
1. Sort copying
2. Group copying
When you use the A3 or B4 size copy paper, pull out the sub-tray in advance. The copied paper
may fall or may not be sorted properly without the sub-tray.
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the finisher button on the basic menu.
When the original is placed in the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (optional), the
sort mode is automatically selected.
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
3
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
Selecting Finishing Modes 117
4
Press the [SORT] (or [GROUP]) button.
Set other copy modes as required.
5
Press the [START] button.
3 SETTING OF BASIC COPY MODES
118 Selecting Finishing Modes
Rotate sort mode
In the rotate sort mode, one set of copies is made to exit on another set of copies, being alter-
nated lengthwise or crosswise.
The available paper sizes for this mode is A4/A4-R. Set the A4/A4-R size paper in the drawers
or on the bypass tray in advance. Paper exits to the receiving tray in this mode.
yThis mode cannot be used with automatic paper selection.
yThe receiving tray loading capacity is approx. 550 sheets (90 g/m2), which may vary depend-
ing on the condition of paper curl.
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the finisher button on the basic menu.
Selecting Finishing Modes 119
4
Press the [ROTATE SORT] button.
Set other copy modes as required.
5
Press the [START] button.
3 SETTING OF BASIC COPY MODES
120 Selecting Finishing Modes
Staple sort mode
When the Finisher (optional) is installed, automatic stapling is enabled. You can select the sta-
pling position from three types.
ySpecial paper such as OHP films or sticker label cannot be used for stapling.
yCopies in different size cannot be stapled. (When the lengths of the copies are the same,
they can be stapled even if their sizes are different.)
(Example of selecting the [FRONT STAPLE SORT] button)
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
When using this mode in bypass copying, specify the paper size in advance.
( P.85 “Bypass Copying”)
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the finisher button on the basic menu.
Selecting Finishing Modes 121
4
Press the [FRONT STAPLE SORT] (or [DOUBLE STAPLE SORT] or
[REAR STAPLE SORT]) button.
Set other copy modes as required.
5
Press the [START] button.
If the paper quantity exceeds the maximum number of sheets that can be stapled, the
Finisher automatically enters the sort mode.
Maximum number of sheets for stapling
yFor the tray loading capacity, see P.402 “Specifications of Options”
yTwo covers of 64 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 can be added. In this case, the covers are included in the
maximum number of sheets that can be stapled.
Saddle Stitch Finisher (MJ-1030)/Finisher (MJ-1101)
*1 MJ-1030: 26 sheets
*2 MJ-1030: 24 sheets
A4, B5 Plain paper, Recycled paper 64 - 80 g/m250 sheets
Plain paper 81 - 90 g/m230 sheets *1
91 - 105 g/m230 sheets *2
A3, A4-R, B4, FOLIO Plain paper, Recycled paper 64 - 80 g/m230 sheets
Plain paper 80 - 105 g/m215 sheets
3 SETTING OF BASIC COPY MODES
122 Selecting Finishing Modes
Magazine sort & saddle stitch mode (booklet mode)
In the magazine sort mode, more than one original can be copied and bound like magazines or
booklets. Also, a set of copied sheets can be automatically folded and stapled at its centre when
the Saddle Stitch Finisher (optional) is installed. The available copy paper sizes for these modes
are A3, A4-R and B4.
The paper weight applicable for this mode is 64 g/m2 to 105 g/m2.
Special paper such as OHP films or sticker label cannot be used for saddle stitching.
When placing portrait originals horizontal to you in the magazine sort mode, set the Image Direc-
tion in the edit menu. Otherwise the originals will not be copied in the proper page order.
( P.198 “IMAGE DIRECTION”)
1. When [MAGAZINE SORT] is selected
2. When [MAGAZINE SORT & SADDLE STITCH] is selected
3. When [SADDLE STITCH] is selected
You can select the magazine sort mode from the edit menu, as well as from the basic menu.
When this mode is selected from the edit menu, you can adjust the binding margin of the
copy. To select this mode from the edit menu, see P.176 “MAGAZINE SORT”.
12
3
2
1
112
94
76
76
12
3
2
1
58
310
112 76
Selecting Finishing Modes 123
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Select the paper size.
yAvailable copy paper sizes are A3, A4-R and B4.
yFor bypass copying, see P.85 “Bypass Copying”.
To use the saddle stitch mode for A3 or B4-size paper, lift the stopper of the saddle stitch
tray.
3
Place the original(s).
yWhen placing originals on the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder, see the illus-
trations ( P.122) for the proper page order of the copies.
yWhen placing originals on the original glass, follow the procedure below.
- When [MAGAZINE SORT] or [MAGAZINE SORT & SADDLE STITCH] is
selected: Place the first page of the originals first.
- When [SADDLE STITCH] is selected: In case of 12-page originals, set them in the
order of pages 12-1, 2-11, 10-3, 4-9, 8-5, then 6-7.
4
Press the finisher button on the basic menu.
3 SETTING OF BASIC COPY MODES
124 Selecting Finishing Modes
5
Press the [MAGAZINE SORT] (or [MAGAZINE SORT & SADDLE
STITCH] or [SADDLE STITCH]) button.
yThe [MAGAZINE SORT & SADDLE STITCH] button and the [SADDLE STITCH] but-
ton are selectable only when the Saddle Stitch Finisher is installed.
ySet other copy modes as required.
6
Press the [START] button.
When placing the originals on the original glass, follow the procedure in P.70 “Placing
originals on the glass”.
Available conditions for saddle stitching
Available paper sizes are A3, A4-R and B4.
*1 When the cover is added, the tray loading capacity is always 5 sets.
yOne cover of 64 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 can be added. In this case, this cover is included in the
maximum number of sheets that can have saddle stitching.
yWhen paper of a different weight is loaded, count the number of sheets for saddle stitching
as applied to the paper with the highest weight.
Paper weight Saddle stitch tray loading capacity
11 - 15 sheets 6 - 10 sheets 5 sheets or less
64 g/m210 sets 20 sets 25 sets
80 g/m210 sets 20 sets 25 sets
90 g/m2 *1 - 15 sets 25 sets
105 g/m2 *1 - 15 sets 25 sets
Selecting Finishing Modes 125
Hole punch mode (optional)
When the Hole Punch Unit (optional) is installed to the finisher (optional), you can punch holes in
the copies.
yThe available copy paper sizes for this mode are A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, B5-R and FOLIO.
yThe paper weight applicable for this mode is 64 g/m2 to 256 g/m2.
Special paper such as OHP films or sticker label cannot be used for hole punching.
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
When using this mode in bypass copying, specify the paper size in advance. ( P.85
“Bypass Copying”)
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the finisher button on the basic menu.
4
Press the [HOLE PUNCH] button.
Set other copy modes as required.
5
Press the [START] button.
3 SETTING OF BASIC COPY MODES
126 Selecting Finishing Modes
Number of punch holes and available paper sizes
Since the number of punch holes and the distance between the holes vary depending on the
country/region, purchase a hole punch unit that meets your requirements. (For details, consult
your service technician.)
Number of punch holes
and hole diameter Available paper sizes
MJ-6004E, MJ-6101E
(Japan and most of Europe)
2 holes
(6.5 mm dia.)
A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, LD,
LG, LT, LT-R, COMP
MJ-6004N, MJ-6101N
(North America)
2/3 holes switchable
(8.0 mm dia.)
2 holes: A4-R, LG, LT-R
3 holes: A3, A4, LD, LT
MJ-6004F, MJ-6101F
(France)
4 holes
(6.5 mm dia.; 80 mm dia.)
A3, A4, LD, LT
MJ-6004S, MJ-6101S
(Sweden)
4 holes
(6.5 mm dia.; 70 mm dia. and
21mm pitch)
A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, LD,
LG, LT-R, COMP
Selecting Finishing Modes 127
Manual stapling (MJ-1101 only)
The manual stapling function which enables you to use the staple function without making cop-
ies is available in the Finisher (MJ-1101, optional). This function is useful when copies are made
without stapling being set or when you want to staple originals.
A: Stapling position lamps C: Manual-stapling lamp
B: [Stapling position] button D: [Manual-stapling] button
1
Press the [Manual-stapling] button.
The shutter in the paper exit area is opened.
2
Press the [Stapling position] button to switch the stapling position.
Stapling positions are the front and the other end.
The stapling position lamp corresponding to the selected stapling position lights in green.
3
Place paper in the lower tray of the finisher.
Jog the paper well and place it with its face down.
Place the paper in front to have it stapled in the front, and in the other end to have it
stapled in the other end.
Check that the manual-stapling lamp lights in green. If not, place the paper again.
A C DB
3 SETTING OF BASIC COPY MODES
128 Selecting Finishing Modes
4
Release the paper and press the [Manual-stapling] button.
The stapling position lamp blinks when the stapling is completed. Remove the paper.
Be sure to release the paper before the manual stapling.
yOperation can be continued while the manual-stapling lamp lights. If no operation is
performed for approx. 15 min., the manual stapling operation is stopped.
yIf you want to stop the manual stapling operation during setting, remove paper and
press the [Manual-stapling] button. The shutter in the paper exit area is closed and
the operation of the manual stapling is finished.
Specification
Acceptable paper size LD, LG, LT, LT-R, COMP, 13” LG, 8.5” SQ, 8K, 16K, A3, A4, A4-R, B4
Maximum number of
sheets for stapling
50 sheets (LT, 8.5” SQ, 16K, A4: 64 - 80 g/m2)
30 sheets (LD, LG, LT-R, COMP, 13” LG, 8K, A3, A4-R, B4, FOLIO: 64 - 80
g/m2)
30 sheets (LT, 8.5” SQ, 16K, A4: 81 - 105 g/m2)
15 sheets (LD, LG, LT-R, COMP, 13” LG, 8K, A3, A4-R, B4, FOLIO: 81 - 105
g/m2)
Stapling position Front, Rear
Duplex Copying 129
Duplex Copying
The following 5 combinations are available for duplex copying.
1. 1-sided original -> 1-sided copy (default setting at installation)
2. 1-sided original -> 2-sided copy
3. 2-sided original -> 2-sided copy
4. 2-sided original -> 1-sided copy
5. Book-type original -> 2-sided copy
Duplex copying is available for plain paper (64 g/m2 to 105g/m2).
-12-
-13-
-15- -12- -13- -15-
-13-
-13-
1
2
5
3
4
3 SETTING OF BASIC COPY MODES
130 Duplex Copying
1-sided original -> 1-sided copy (default setting at installation)
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Place the original(s).
3
Confirm that the simplex/duplex button on the basic menu is [1 -> 1
SIMPLEX].
If [1 -> 1 SIMPLEX] is not shown, press the simplex/duplex button to display the next
menu, and then press the [1 -> 1 SIMPLEX] button on that menu.
Set other copy modes as required.
4
Press the [START] button.
Duplex Copying 131
1-sided original -> 2-sided copy
When you copy 1-sided portrait originals to 2-sided copies placing them in a landscape direc-
tion, you can make a booklet-type copy in the direction of “open toward the left” opening, using
the image direction mode in the edit menu. ( P.198 “IMAGE DIRECTION”)
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
When using this mode in bypass copying, specify the paper size in advance. ( P.85
“Bypass Copying”)
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the simplex/duplex button on the basic menu.
4
Press the [1 -> 2 DUPLEX] button.
Set other copy modes as required.
5
Press the [START] button.
When placing an original on the original glass, follow steps 5 to 6 of P.79 “Placing an
original on the original glass” continuously.
3 SETTING OF BASIC COPY MODES
132 Duplex Copying
2-sided original -> 2-sided copy
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
When using this mode in bypass copying, specify the paper size in advance.
( P.85 “Bypass Copying”)
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the simplex/duplex button on the basic menu.
4
Press the [2 -> 2 DUPLEX] button.
Set other copy modes as required.
5
Press the [START] button.
When placing an original on the original glass, follow steps 5 to 6 of P.79 “Placing an
original on the original glass” continuously.
Duplex Copying 133
2-sided original -> 1-sided copy
When a 2-sided ‘open to left’ (Book) portrait original is copied using the image direction mode in
the edit menu with [2-Sided Originals to 1-Sided Copies], copies can be adjusted to the same
direction. ( P.198 “IMAGE DIRECTION”)
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the simplex/duplex button on the basic menu.
4
Press the [2 -> 1 SPLIT] button.
Set other copy modes as required.
5
Press the [START] button.
3 SETTING OF BASIC COPY MODES
134 Duplex Copying
Book-type original -> 2-sided copy
You can make a booklet-type copy in the same page configuration in which the original is.
The acceptable paper size for this function is A4 or B5 only.
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
When using this mode in bypass copying, specify the paper size in advance.
( P.85 “Bypass Copying”)
2
Press the simplex/duplex button on the basic menu.
3
Press the [BOOK -> 2] button.
Duplex Copying 135
4
Select the book copying type.
Press the [RIGHT -> RIGHT] button (= default setting at the installation) if copying should
start at a right-hand page and end at a right-hand page. Other copying types are
selectable by pressing any of the [RIGHT -> LEFT], [LEFT -> LEFT] and [LEFT ->
RIGHT] buttons.
e.g.: If pages 2 to 6 of a book which opens to the left are to be copied, select [LEFT ->
RIGHT].
The yellow indicator line for booklet copying moves to the centre of the original glass.
E
6
F
7
A
2
B
3
3 SETTING OF BASIC COPY MODES
136 Duplex Copying
5
Select A4 or B5 copy size.
Only A4 or B5 size is available. Press the drawer button on the touch panel, or use the
paper source selection ( / ) buttons to select A4 or B5 size.
E.g.: When A4-size paper is selected
yIf you need a binding space, select the book margin mode. ( P.161 “IMAGE
SHIFT”)
ySet other copy modes as required.
Do not place heavy objects (4 kg or more) on the original glass and do not press on it
with force. Breaking the glass could injure you.
6
Open and place the first
page(s) on the original glass.
Centre the booklet on the yellow
indicator line with its bottom toward you.
Duplex Copying 137
7
Press the [START] button. When the data of the opened pages have
been scanned, open the next page and set the booklet on the origi-
nal glass again.
Repeat the procedures above until all the desired pages have been scanned. If the last
copy is only a single page, press the [COPY FINAL PAGE] button on the touch panel
before the scanning of this page is started. The scanned pages will be copied.
8
When all the pages have been scanned, press the [FINISHED] but-
ton on the touch panel.
yThe scanned pages will be copied.
yFor setting image shift, see P.165 “Creating a bookbinding margin”.
3 SETTING OF BASIC COPY MODES
138 Original Mode
Original Mode
You can make copies with optimal image quality by selecting the following modes for your origi-
nal.
The selectable original mode differs depending on the colour mode ( P.103). Switch the colour
mode first, and then select the original mode.
Full colour
Black
Auto colour
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the original mode button on the basic menu.
TEXT/PHOTO: Originals with text and photographs mixed (Default setting)
TEXT: Originals with text (or text and line art) only
PHOTO: Originals with general photographs on photographic printing paper
PRINTED IMAGE: Originals with photogravure (e.g. Magazine, brochure)
MAP: Originals with fine illustrations or text
TEXT/PHOTO: Originals with text and photographs mixed (Default setting)
TEXT: Originals with text (or text and line art) only
PHOTO: Originals with photographs
IMAGE SMOOTHING: Originals with text and photographs mixed, especially originals
requiring higher reproducibility on photos
TEXT/PHOTO: Originals with text and photographs mixed
TEXT: Originals with text (or text and line art) only
PRINTED IMAGE: Originals with photogravure (e.g. Magazine, brochure)
Original Mode 139
4
Select and press the button for the most appropriate original mode
for your original.
The selectable original mode differs depending on the colour mode as follows.
Full colour
Black
Auto colour
Set other copy modes as required.
5
Press the [START] button.
3 SETTING OF BASIC COPY MODES
140 Copy Density Adjustment
Copy Density Adjustment
There are 2 types of copy density adjustment: the automatic copy density mode and the manual
copy density mode. In the automatic copy density mode, the equipment automatically selects
the most appropriate copy density by detecting the density of the original. In the manual copy
density mode, you can adjust the copy density manually according to the conditions of the origi-
nal.
Default setting: Manual density mode for “FULL COLOUR” / “AUTO COLOUR”, Automatic den-
sity mode for “BLACK”
Automatic copy density mode
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Place the original(s).
3
Full colour / Auto colour: Press the [AUTO] button.
Black: Confirm that the [AUTO] button is selected. If it is not, press
the button.
Set other copy modes as required.
4
Press the [START] button.
Copy Density Adjustment 141
Manual copy density mode
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press either the or button to adjust the copy density to the
desired level.
yThe copied image becomes lighter as you press the button and darker as you
press the button.
ySet other copy modes as required.
4
Press the [START] button.
3 SETTING OF BASIC COPY MODES
142 Copy Density Adjustment
4.IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
This chapter describes the image adjustment functions allowing you to change the overall colour balance of
the copied image, copy an original in a specified colour, and so on.
Colour Balance (YMCK Adjustment)...................................................................144
RGB Adjustment ...................................................................................................146
One-Touch Adjustment ........................................................................................147
Background Adjustment ......................................................................................148
Sharpness..............................................................................................................149
Twin Colour (2-Colour) Copy ...............................................................................150
TWIN COLOUR SELECTABLE.......................................................................................................150
RED & BLACK ................................................................................................................................153
Monocolour copying.............................................................................................156
Hue .........................................................................................................................157
Saturation ..............................................................................................................158
4 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
144 Colour Balance (YMCK Adjustment)
Colour Balance (YMCK Adjustment)
This function allows you to adjust an overall colour balance of the copied image by changing
each toner amount of yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C) and black (K).
This function is available only in the full colour mode and the auto colour mode.
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the [IMAGE] button to enter the image menu, and then press
the [COLOUR BALANCE] button.
Colour Balance (YMCK Adjustment) 145
4
Press the or button of the colour to obtain the desired colour
balance. Then press the [ENTER] button.
y at the centre of each colour bar denotes its default setting.
yPressing the button strengthens the adjusted colour, and pressing the button
weakens it.
ySelect other copy modes as required.
Each colour balance on every density area can be adjusted by your pressing the
[DETAIL] button.
For example, when you adjust the high density area of magenta (M) to side, magenta
in its high density area becomes darker. When you adjust the low density area of
magenta (M) to side, magenta in its low density area becomes lighter.
5
Press the [START] button.
Cancelling the colour balance adjustment
Move the indicator of the colour whose adjustment you want to cancel its adjustment to by
your pressing the or button, and then press the [ENTER] button.
If you want to cancel the adjustment of all colours, press the [DEFAULT] button, and then press
the [ENTER] button.
4 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
146 RGB Adjustment
RGB Adjustment
This function allows you to adjust an overall colour balance of the copied image by changing the
strength of red (R), green (G) and blue (B) at the time of scanning.
This function is available only in the full colour mode and the auto colour mode.
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the [IMAGE] button to enter the image menu, and then press
the [RGB ADJUSTMENT] button.
4
Press the or button of the colour to obtain the desired colour
balance. Then press the [ENTER] button.
y ” at the centre of each colour bar denotes its default setting.
yPressing the button strengthens the adjusted colour, and pressing the button
weakens it.
ySelect other copy modes as required.
5
Press the [START] button.
Cancelling RGB adjustment
Move the indicator of the colour whose adjustment you want to cancel its adjustment to by
your pressing the or button, and then press the [ENTER] button.
If you want to cancel the adjustment of all colours, press the [DEFAULT] button, and then press
the [ENTER] button.
One-Touch Adjustment 147
One-Touch Adjustment
This function allows you to obtain the desired image quality. You can select among 5 modes;
“WARM”, “COOL”, “VIVID”, “CLEAR” or “MARKER” in a one-touch operation. When you select
[MARKER], the multiple colours drawn with a highlight pen on the original can be copied so as to
be distinguished clearly.
The colour shade may not be the same as that of the original depending on the colour of the
highlight pen.
This function is available only in the full colour mode.
See Colour Guide for the adjustment results.
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the [IMAGE] button to enter the image menu, and then press
the [ONE TOUCH ADJUSTMENT] button.
4
Press the [WARM], [COOL], [VIVID], [CLEAR] or [MARKER] button.
Select other copy modes as required.
5
Press the [START] button.
4 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
148 Background Adjustment
Background Adjustment
This function allows you to adjust the density of the original’s background. It avoids the back
side of 2-sided originals becoming visible on the front side of the original through the copy.
This mode can be used regardless of the colour mode setting.
yThis mode cannot be used with the automatic copy density mode. ( P.140)
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the [IMAGE] button to enter the image menu, and then press
the [BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT] button.
4
Press the [LIGHT] (or [DARK]) button to adjust the density, and then
press the [ENTER] button.
Select other copy modes as required.
5
Press the [START] button.
Cancelling the background adjustment
yPress the [DEFAULT] button and then the [ENTER] button.
yAdjust the background level to “0”, and then press the [ENTER] button.
Sharpness 149
Sharpness
This function allows you to emphasize or blur the outline of the image. When the sharpness level
is adjusted to the [SOFT] side, the moire fringes are suppressed. If it is adjusted to the [SHARP]
side, the letters and fine lines become sharper.
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the [IMAGE] button to enter the image menu, and then press
the [SHARPNESS] button.
4
Press the [SOFT] (or [SHARP]) button to adjust the sharpness, and
then press the [ENTER] button.
yWhen the sharpness level is adjusted to the [SOFT] side, the moire fringes are sup-
pressed. If it is adjusted to the [SHARP] side, the letters and fine lines become
sharper.
ySelect other copy modes as required.
5
Press the [START] button.
Cancelling the background adjustment
yPress the [DEFAULT] button and then the [ENTER] button.
yAdjust the background level to “0”, and then press the [ENTER] button.
4 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
150 Twin Colour (2-Colour) Copy
Twin Colour (2-Colour) Copy
This function allows you to copy a coloured original in 2 specified colours. There are 2 types of
twin colour copy as follows:
TWIN COLOUR SELECTABLE: The black part and the parts other than black in the original are
copied separately in 2 colours which have been manually specified.
RED & BLACK: The red part in the original is copied in red and the parts other than red are cop-
ied in black and white.
The colour may not be correctly reproduced depending on originals. In that case, copy them in
the full colour mode.
TWIN COLOUR SELECTABLE
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the [IMAGE] button to enter the image menu, and then press
the [TWIN COLOUR COPY] button.
4
Press the [TWIN COLOUR SELECTABLE] button.
Twin Colour (2-Colour) Copy 151
5
Select a colour for the parts other than black in the original. Press
the [SECOND COLOUR] button, and then select the desired colour.
6
Select a colour for the black part in the original. Press the [CHANGE
BLACK TO] button, and then select the desired colour.
4 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
152 Twin Colour (2-Colour) Copy
7
Press the [ADJUST] button to adjust the colour balance as
required.
yEach the colour balance of yellow and magenta on every density area can be
adjusted by your pressing the [DETAIL] button.
For example, when you adjust the high density area of magenta (M) to side,
magenta in its high density area becomes darker. When you adjust the low density
area of magenta (M) to side, magenta in its low density area becomes lighter.
yWhen neither of two colours are black, or when the both of two colours are black, this
adjustment is disabled.
yWhen two colours specified are the combination of black and a colour other than
black, colour balance adjustment is enabled only on the colour other than black.
In case the black part of the original is copied in cyan and other parts are copied in black,
for example, only the colour balance of cyan part can be adjusted.
Twin Colour (2-Colour) Copy 153
8
Press the [ENTER] button.
Select other copy modes as required.
9
Press the [START] button.
Cancelling colour balance adjustment
ySet the colour balance of the colour you want to cancel its adjustment to , and then press
the [ENTER] button.
yIf you want to cancel the adjustment of all colours, press the [DEFAULT] button, and then
press the [ENTER] button.
RED & BLACK
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the [IMAGE] button to enter the image menu, and then press
the [TWIN COLOUR COPY] button.
4 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
154 Twin Colour (2-Colour) Copy
4
Press the [RED & BLACK] button.
5
To adjust the red colour, press the [ADJUST] button. If you do not
change the colour balance, press the [ENTER] button and proceed
to step 7.
Twin Colour (2-Colour) Copy 155
6
Adjust the colour balance or the red-and-black area adjustment as
required. Press the [ENTER] button after adjustment.
A: Red colour balance adjustment
Press the or button of the desired colour to adjust the red colour balance.
B: Red/Black area adjustment
Press the or button to adjust the area to be copied in red or black. When you set
the red area larger, the area copied in red becomes larger. When you set the black area
larger, the area copied in black becomes larger.
Each the colour balance of yellow and magenta on every density area can be adjusted by
your pressing the [DETAIL] button.
For example, when you adjust the high density area of magenta (M) to side, magenta
in its high density area becomes darker. When you adjust the low density area of
magenta (M) to side, magenta in its low density area becomes lighter.
7
Select other copy modes as required, and then press the [START]
button.
Cancelling colour balance adjustment
ySet the colour balance of the colour you want to cancel its adjustment to , and then press
the [ENTER] button.
yIf you want to cancel the adjustment of all colours, press the [DEFAULT] button, and then
press the [ENTER] button.
A B
4 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
156 Monocolour copying
Monocolour copying
You can copy in a single colour except black.
Monocolour copying is selectable among the following 10 colours:
Magenta, yellow, yellow green, cyan, pink, red, orange, green, blue, purple
1
Place paper in the drawer.
2
Place an original.
3
Press the [IMAGE] button to enter the image menu, and then press
the [MONO COLOUR] button.
4
Press the button corresponding to the desired colour.
Select other copy modes as required.
5
Press the [START] button.
Hue 157
Hue
Hue on the basic colour can be adjusted.
This function is available only in the full colour mode and the auto colour mode.
1
Place paper in the drawer.
2
Place an original.
3
Press the [IMAGE] button to enter the image menu, and then press
the [HUE] button.
4
Adjust the hue of the entire image with the or button of the
section A. With the or button of the section B, you can adjust
the hue of each basic colour.
5
Press the [ENTER] button.
Select other copy modes as required.
6
Press the [START] button.
Cancelling hue adjustment
ySet the hue of the colour you want to cancel its adjustment to , and then press the
[ENTER] button.
yIf you want to cancel the adjustment of all colours, press the [DEFAULT] button, and then
press the [ENTER] button.
A B
4 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
158 Saturation
Saturation
Colour saturation of the entire image can be adjusted.
This function is available only in the full colour mode and the auto colour mode.
1
Place paper in the drawer.
2
Place an original.
3
Press the [IMAGE] button to enter the image menu, and then press
the [SATURATION] button.
4
Adjust saturation with the or button. Press the [ENTER] but-
ton after adjustment.
Select other copy modes as required.
5
Press the [START] button.
Cancelling saturation adjustment
ySet the saturation of the colour you want to cancel its adjustment to and then press the
[ENTER] button.
yPress the [DEFAULT] button, and then press the [ENTER] button.
5.USING THE EDITING FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes various editing functions including IMAGE SHIFT, 2IN1 / 4IN1, JOB BUILD and so on,
which result in neatly finished copy jobs.
IMAGE SHIFT.........................................................................................................161
Creating a right or left margin..........................................................................................................161
Creating a top or bottom margin .....................................................................................................163
Creating a bookbinding margin .......................................................................................................165
EDGE ERASE ........................................................................................................167
BOOK CENTRE ERASE ........................................................................................169
DUAL PAGE ...........................................................................................................171
2IN1 / 4IN1..............................................................................................................173
MAGAZINE SORT..................................................................................................176
EDITING .................................................................................................................178
Trimming / Masking.........................................................................................................................178
Mirror image ....................................................................................................................................181
Negative/Positive reversal...............................................................................................................182
XY ZOOM ...............................................................................................................183
COVER SHEET ......................................................................................................185
SHEET INSERTION ...............................................................................................188
TIME STAMP ..........................................................................................................191
PAGE NUMBER .....................................................................................................192
JOB BUILD.............................................................................................................194
IMAGE DIRECTION ...............................................................................................198
BOOK - TABLET ....................................................................................................200
ADF / SADF............................................................................................................201
Continuous feed mode ....................................................................................................................201
Single feed mode ............................................................................................................................202
FULL IMAGE ..........................................................................................................204
IMAGE REPEAT.....................................................................................................206
IMAGE SHIFT 161
IMAGE SHIFT
A margin for binding can be created. The following types are available.
1. Created by shifting the original image to either the right or left side (Right or Left margin)
2. Created by shifting the original image to either the upper or lower side (Top or Bottom
margin)
3. Created binding margins in the centre (inner margin) (Bookbinding margin)
Select this setting when using “Book-type original -> 2-sided copy” ( P.134).
yThe ‘Top or Bottom margin’ can be used in combination with the ‘Right or Left margin’ or the
‘Bookbinding margin’.
yThe margin width can be adjusted in 1 mm increments.
Creating a right or left margin
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
When using this mode in bypass copying ( P.85), be sure to specify the paper size.
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the [EDIT] button to enter the edit menu, and then press the
[IMAGE SHIFT] button.
12
5 USING THE EDITING FUNCTIONS
162 IMAGE SHIFT
4
Press the [LEFT] (or [RIGHT]) button.
5
Adjust the margin width by pressing the [2 mm] or [100 mm] button,
and then press the [ENTER] button.
yThe default width of the margin is 7 mm.
yIn duplex copying, margins on the back are created on the other side of those in the
front. ( P.129 “Duplex Copying”)
6
Press the [ENTER] button.
Select other copy modes as required.
7
Press the [START] button.
IMAGE SHIFT 163
Creating a top or bottom margin
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
When using this mode in bypass copying ( P.85), be sure to specify the paper size.
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the [EDIT] button to enter the edit menu, and then press the
[IMAGE SHIFT] button.
4
Press the [TOP] (or [BOTTOM]) button.
5
Adjust the margin width by pressing the [2 mm] or [100 mm] button,
and then press the [ENTER] button.
yThe default width of the margin is 7 mm.
5 USING THE EDITING FUNCTIONS
164 IMAGE SHIFT
6
Press the [ENTER] button.
Select other copy modes as required.
7
Press the [START] button.
IMAGE SHIFT 165
Creating a bookbinding margin
This is used when setting “Book-type original -> 2-sided copy” ( P.134) in duplex copying. The
margin is created in the centre (inner margin).
yAcceptable paper sizes for this function is A4 and B5 only.
yThe width of the white border can be adjusted in 1 mm increments.
1
Press the [EDIT] button to enter the edit menu, and then press the
[IMAGE SHIFT] button.
2
Press the [BOOK] button.
3
Adjust the margin width by pressing the [2 mm] or [30 mm] button,
and then press the [ENTER] button.
The default width of the margin is 14 mm.
5 USING THE EDITING FUNCTIONS
166 IMAGE SHIFT
4
Press the [ENTER] button.
Set “Book-type original -> 2-sided copy” ( P.134) in duplex copying as well.
EDGE ERASE 167
EDGE ERASE
If the original has a dirty or torn edge, it may be reproduced as a black stain on the copy. In that
case, set the edge erase. A white border is created along the edges of the copy, eliminating
those black stains.
yThis function is available only in the case of standard-size originals.
yThe width of the edge erase margin can be adjusted in 1 mm increments.
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
When using this mode in bypass copying ( P.85), be sure to specify the paper size.
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the [EDIT] button to enter the edit menu, and then press the
[EDGE ERASE] button.
5 USING THE EDITING FUNCTIONS
168 EDGE ERASE
4
Adjust the width by pressing the [2 mm] or [50 mm] button, and
then press the [ENTER] button.
yThe default width of the white border is 5 mm.
ySelect other copy modes as required.
5
Press the [START] button.
BOOK CENTRE ERASE 169
BOOK CENTRE ERASE
This function allows you to erase the shadow in the centre of a book original.
1. Before book centre erase is set
2. After book centre erase is set
The width of the book center erase margin can be adjusted in 1 mm increments.
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
When using this mode in bypass copying ( P.85), be sure to specify the paper size.
2
Press the drawer button representing the desired paper size on the
touch panel.
3
Press the [EDIT] button to enter the edit menu, and then press the
[BOOK CENTRE ERASE] button.
12
5 USING THE EDITING FUNCTIONS
170 BOOK CENTRE ERASE
4
Adjust the width by pressing the [2 mm] or [50 mm] button, and
then press the [ENTER] button.
yThe default width of the erase margin is 10 mm.
ySelect other copy modes as required.
5
Place a book original on the original glass.
Align its centre with the yellow guide line near the centre of the original glass.
Do not place heavy objects (4 kg or more) on the original glass and do not press on it
with force. Breaking the glass could injure you.
6
Press the [START] button.
DUAL PAGE 171
DUAL PAGE
This function allows the facing pages of a book or magazine to be copied page by page onto 2
separate sheets of paper or duplex-copied on one sheet. It is not necessary to move the original
on the glass. You can also place a pair of A4 sized originals side by side and copy them on sep-
arate sheets of paper.
yAcceptable paper sizes for this function is A4 only.
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Press the [EDIT] button to enter the edit menu, and then the [DUAL
PAGE] button.
3
Press the [1 SIDE] (or [2 SIDE]) button.
1 SIDE: Making copies of the facing pages on 2 separate sheets of paper page by page
2 SIDE: Making duplex copies of them on one sheet
yThe yellow indicator line for placing a book moves near the centre of the original
glass.
yIf you need a binding margin, set the right or left margin. ( P.161 “Creating a right or
left margin”)
-12- -13- -12- -13-
5 USING THE EDITING FUNCTIONS
172 DUAL PAGE
4
Press the [BASIC] button to enter the basic menu, and then select
the copy size (A4 or B5).
yWhen using this mode in bypass copying ( P.85), be sure to specify the paper size.
ySelect other copy modes as required.
6
Turn to the next page, set the book again, and then press the
[START] button.
Repeat this step until all the originals have finished being scanned.
7
After all the originals have finished being scanned, press the [FIN-
ISHED] button.
Press the [COPY FINAL PAGE] button if the last original is a 1-sided page.
5
Place the first page(s) to be
copied on the glass, and then
press the [START] button.
Centre the book on the yellow indicator
line with the bottom toward you.
( P. 7 1 )
Do not place heavy objects (4 kg or more) on the original glass and do not press on it with
force. Breaking the glass could injure you.
2IN1 / 4IN1 173
2IN1 / 4IN1
This feature allows multiple originals to be reduced and copied onto a single sheet of paper.
There are 2 modes: 2IN1 copying, where 2 originals are copied onto a single sheet, and 4IN1
copying, where 4 originals are copied onto a single sheet. In addition, duplex 2IN1 / 4IN1 modes
are available, where four/eight originals can be copied to 2 sides of a single sheet of paper.
2IN1
4IN1
2IN1 DUPLEX (a: Side 1, b: Side 2)
yWhen a copy is turned with the line as a pivot, originals are printed on Side 2 (back face) as
shown.
4IN1 DUPLEX (a: Side 1, b: Side 2)
yWhen a copy is turned with the line as a pivot, originals are printed on Side 2 (back face) as
shown.
aa
bb
ab
5 USING THE EDITING FUNCTIONS
174 2IN1 / 4IN1
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
yWhen using this mode in bypass copying ( P.85), be sure to specify the paper size.
yIf the paper size is not changed, paper of the same size as the original is selected.
yTo make copies on paper which is not the same size as the original, press the
[ZOOM] button on the basic menu to enter the following menu, select the desired
paper size and press the [AMS] button.
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the [EDIT] button to enter the edit menu, and then press the
[2IN1 / 4IN1] button.
4
Select the type of image combination.
2IN1 / 4IN1 175
5
Press the [1 SIDE] (or [2 SIDE]) button.
Select other copy modes as required.
6
Press the [START] button.
yWhen the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (optional) is used, the original is
scanned and copying starts.
yWhen the original is placed on the original glass, perform steps 7 and 8.
7
Place the next original, and press the [START] button.
yData scanning of this original starts.
yThe next original will also be scanned in the same manner when you press the [YES]
button on the touch panel, and then press the [START] button on the control panel.
yRepeat this step until all the originals have finished being scanned.
8
After all the originals have finished being scanned, press the
[FINISHED] button.
Copying starts.
5 USING THE EDITING FUNCTIONS
176 MAGAZINE SORT
MAGAZINE SORT
This function allows 1-sided originals to be copied and sorted so that they can be folded and
bound along a centre line like typical magazines or booklets.
Example of copying a 12-page document
When placing a portrait originals horizontal to you in the magazine sort mode, be sure to set the
correct direction of the originals. ( P.198 “IMAGE DIRECTION”)
Using this function in combination with the Saddle Stitch Finisher (optional) makes copies auto-
matically folded in half and stapled along their centre line.
Example of copying with the Saddle Stitch Finisher (optional)
The Magazine sort function has 2 procedures; operating from the basic menu and operating
from the edit menu. When operating from the edit menu, the margin width can be adjusted.
To operate from the basic menu, see P.122 “Magazine sort & saddle stitch mode (booklet
mode)”.
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
When using the Saddle Stitch Finisher, A3, A4-R, B4, LD, LG and LT-R are available.
2
Select the paper type.
yFor drawer feeding, see P.100 “Manual paper selection”.
yFor bypass feeding, see P.85 “Bypass Copying”.
3
Place the original(s).
12
3
2
1
112
94
76
76
12
3
2
1
MAGAZINE SORT 177
4
Press the [EDIT] button to enter the edit menu, and then press the
[MAGAZINE SORT] button.
5
Set the saddle-stitch and the binding margin and press the [ENTER]
button.
yTo staple the centre line using the Saddle Stitch Finisher (optional), press the [STA-
PLE ON] button. For the maximum number of sheets that can be stapled, see
P.124 “Available conditions for saddle stitching”.
yTo adjust the width, press the [2 mm] or [30 mm] button.
yThe default width of the margin is 2 mm.
yThe margin width can be adjusted in 1 mm increments.
ySelect other copy modes as required.
6
Press the [START] button.
5 USING THE EDITING FUNCTIONS
178 EDITING
EDITING
Trimming / Masking
This function allows you to copy only the inside of the specified area on an original (trimming) or
copy with the specified area masked (masking). Up to 4 rectangular areas can be specified on
an original.
yImage editing is only available with standard-size originals.
yIf the original and copy paper sizes are set incorrectly, the image in the specified range may
not be copied correctly.
1. An example of trimming
2. An example of masking
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
When using this mode in bypass copying, be sure to specify the paper size ( P.98
“Paper Selection”).
2
Press the [EDIT] button to enter the edit menu, and then press the
[EDITING] button.
12
EDITING 179
3
Press the [TRIM] (or [MASK]) button.
4
Place the original with its face
up on the original glass.
Set the original with its face up and
bottom toward you and fit its top left
corner against that of the original glass
to align it with the original scales.
Do not place heavy objects (4kg or more) on the original glass and do not press on it with
force. Breaking the glass could injure you.
5
Specify the area. Read the fol-
lowing 4 values of the left and
top scales.
The marks of the original scale have a 2 mm pitch.
X1: Distance from the top left to the left edge of the specified area
X2: Distance from the top left to the right edge of the specified area
Y1: Distance from the top left to the upper edge of the specified area
Y2: Distance from the top left to the lower edge of the specified area
5 USING THE EDITING FUNCTIONS
180 EDITING
6
Enter the values read in step 5 for the specified area, and then
press the [SET] button. Set 4 values in order.
yAfter the setting of 4 values is finished, the next edit area menu is displayed. Repeat
steps 5 and 6 when you specify other areas. Up to 4 areas can be specified on an
original.
yTo correct the value which has been set, press the [RESET] button. Pressing it once
makes the highlighted field move one position upward. Highlight the field in which you
want to rectify the value, and then key in the correct one.
7
Press the [ENTER] button after specifying the area.
9
Press the [START] button.
8
Place the original(s) with its
face down.
ySet the original with its face down
and bottom toward you and fit its top
left corner against that of the original
glass.
ySelect other copy modes as
required.
EDITING 181
Mirror image
This function allows you to make copies with images completely reversed (right and left).
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
When using this mode in bypass copying, be sure to specify the paper size ( P.98
“Paper Selection”).
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the [EDIT] button to enter the edit menu, and then press the
[EDITING] button.
4
Press the [MIRROR] button.
Select other copy modes as required.
5
Press the [START] button.
5 USING THE EDITING FUNCTIONS
182 EDITING
Negative/Positive reversal
This function allows you to make copies reversing the contrasting density on the whole face of
original.
This function can be used only when the colour mode is “BLACK” or “FULL COLOUR”.
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
When using this mode in bypass copying, be sure to specify the paper size ( P.98
“Paper Selection”).
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the [EDIT] button to enter the edit menu, and then press the
[EDITING] button.
4
Press the [NEG/POS] button.
ySelect other copy modes as required.
5
Press the [START] button.
XY ZOOM 183
XY ZOOM
This function allows you to make copies with different reproduction ratios set for the X (horizon-
tal) and Y (vertical) direction.
The reproduction ratio is in the range of 25 to 400%. However, in the following cases, it is in the
range of 25 to 200%.
yWhen the colour mode is “FULL COLOUR” or “AUTO COLOUR”
yWhen the colour mode is “BLACK” and the original mode is “PHOTO”.
yWhen the original mode is “IMAGE SMOOTHING”
yWhen “TWIN COLOUR COPY” is used
yWhen “MONO COLOUR COPY” is used.
yWhen the original is set on the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (optional)
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
When using this mode in bypass copying ( P.85), be sure to specify the paper size.
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the [EDIT] button to enter the edit menu, and then press the
[XY ZOOM] button.
100%
100%
200%
200%
5 USING THE EDITING FUNCTIONS
184 XY ZOOM
4
Using the [25%] and [400%] buttons, set the reproduction ratio for X
and press the [SET] button. Then set the reproduction ratio for Y.
5
Press the [ENTER] button.
Select other copy modes as required.
6
Press the [START] button.
COVER SHEET 185
COVER SHEET
This function allows you to insert special sheets of paper (such as colour paper) into a set of
copies as cover sheets. A copied front cover sheet can be inserted. The back cover sheet is
inserted blank. There are 4 types of cover sheet modes:
1. Adding a blank front cover sheet ([TOP BLANK])
2. Adding a copied front cover sheet ([TOP COPIED])
3. Adding a blank front and blank back cover sheets ([BOTH BLANK])
4. Adding a copied front and blank back cover sheets ([TOP COPIED BACK BLANK])
1
Place the cover sheet.
yPlace the cover sheet in the drawer selected for cover sheets or on the bypass tray.
yWhen it is placed in the drawer for the cover sheets, you must set the paper type
(cover sheet), size and thickness. ( P.62 “Drawer for special uses”)
yWhen it is placed on the bypass tray, you must set the paper size and thickness. (
P.85 “Bypass Copying”)
yMake sure the cover sheet and the sheets other than the cover sheet are placed in
the same direction and of the same size.
2
Place paper (other than cover paper) in the drawer(s).
32
1
32
1
REPORT
2003
32
1
32
1
REPORT
2003
REPORT
2003
REPORT
2003
1
2
3
4
5 USING THE EDITING FUNCTIONS
186 COVER SHEET
3
Place the original(s).
Originals should be placed from the first page on the original glass.
4
Press the [EDIT] button to enter the edit menu and then the [COVER
SHEET] button.
5
Press the desired cover sheet button.
TOP BLANK: To add a blank front cover sheet
TOP COPIED: To add a copied front cover sheet
BOTH BLANK: To add blank front and back cover sheets
TOP COPIED BACK BLANK: To add copied front and blank back cover sheets
When “1-Sided Original to 2-Sided Copy” with the [TOP COPIED] or [TOP COPIED BACK
BLANK] button pressed is performed, a 1-sided copy is made for a cover sheet.
COVER SHEET 187
6
Press the [BASIC] button to enter the basic menu, and then select a
paper source of the same size and direction as the cover sheet.
Select other copy modes as required.
7
Press the [START] button.
yWhen the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (optional) is used, the original is
scanned and copying starts.
yWhen the original is placed on the original glass, perform steps 8 and 9.
8
Place the next original, and press the [START] button.
yData scanning of this original starts.
yThe next original will also be scanned in the same manner when you press the [YES]
button on the touch panel, and then press the [START] button on the control panel.
yRepeat this step until all the originals have finished being scanned.
9
After all the originals have finished being scanned, press the [FIN-
ISHED] button.
Copying starts.
5 USING THE EDITING FUNCTIONS
188 SHEET INSERTION
SHEET INSERTION
This function allows you to insert special sheets of paper (such as colour paper) into the speci-
fied pages. 2 kinds of sheets for insertion are available. Up to 50 pages can be specified for
[INSERT SOURCE 1] and [INSERT SOURCE 2] combined. There are 2 types of sheet insertion
modes:
1. Inserting a copied sheet into the specified page ([COPIED])
2. Inserting a blank sheet into the page previous to the specified one ([BLANK])
1
Place the special sheets of paper.
yPlace the special sheets of paper on the bypass tray or in the drawer selected for
sheet insertion.
yBoth special sheets of paper and plain paper should be placed in the same direction
and be of the same size.
P.62 “Drawer for special uses”
2
Place plain paper in the drawer(s).
3
Place the original(s).
Originals should be placed from the first page on the original glass.
4
Press the [EDIT] button to enter the edit menu, and then press the
[SHEET INSERTION] button.
REPORT
2003
1
2
3
4
32
1
4
REPORT
2003
2
3
1
1
2
SHEET INSERTION 189
5
Press the [COPIED] (or [BLANK]) button.
COPIED: To insert a copied sheet into the specified page
BLANK: To insert a blank sheet into the page previous to the specified one
6
Press the [INSERT SOURCE 1] (or [INSERT SOURCE 2]) button.
7
Key in the desired page number (3 digits or less) for insertion and
press the [SET] button.
yWhen [COPIED] is selected on step 5, a copied sheet is inserted into the specified
page. When [BLANK] is selected, a blank sheet is inserted into the page previous to
the specified one.
yUp to 50 pages can be specified for [INSERT SOURCE 1] and [INSERT SOURCE 2]
combined. When inserting multiple sheets one by one at specified pages, repeat
steps 6 and 7.
5 USING THE EDITING FUNCTIONS
190 SHEET INSERTION
8
After the specifying of all insertion pages is finished, press the
[ENTER] button.
9
Press the [BASIC] button to enter the basic menu, and then select a
paper source of the same size and direction as the sheet insertion.
Select other copy modes as required.
10
Press the [START] button.
yWhen the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (optional) is used, the original is
scanned and copying starts.
yWhen the original is placed on the original glass, perform steps 11 and 12.
11
Place the next original, and press the [START] button.
yData scanning of this original starts.
yThe next original will also be scanned in the same manner when you press the [YES]
button on the touch panel, and then press the [START] button on the control panel.
yRepeat this step until all the originals have finished being scanned.
12
After all the originals have finished being scanned, press the [FIN-
ISHED] button.
Copying starts.
TIME STAMP 191
TIME STAMP
This function allows you to add the time and date of the scanning to the copies.
1. Printed at the bottom of a portrait copy
2. Printed at the top of a landscape copy
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the [EDIT] button to enter the edit menu, and then press the
[TIME STAMP] button.
4
Select the orientation ([Short edge] or [Long edge]) and position
([UPPER] or [LOWER]) of the date and time to be printed, and then
press the [ENTER] button.
Select other copy modes as required.
5
Press the [START] button.
DD.MM.YYYY 14:54
DD.MM.YYYY 14:54
12
5 USING THE EDITING FUNCTIONS
192 PAGE NUMBER
PAGE NUMBER
This function allows you to add page numbers to the copies.
1. Printed at the bottom centre of a portrait copy
2. Printed at the top right of a landscape copy
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the [EDIT] button to enter the edit menu, and then press the
[PAGE NUMBER] button.
3
2
1
3
2
1
12
PAGE NUMBER 193
4
Select the orientation ([Short edge] or [Long edge]) and position
([TOP LEFT], [TOP CENTRE], [TOP RIGHT], [BOTTOM LEFT],
[BOTTOM CENTRE] or [BOTTOM RIGHT]) of the page number to be
printed, and then press the [ENTER] button.
5
Key in the starting page number and then press the [ENTER] but-
ton.
Select other copy modes as required.
6
Press the [START] button.
5 USING THE EDITING FUNCTIONS
194 JOB BUILD
JOB BUILD
This function allows you to copy different kinds of originals at one time.
Scanning is performed by setting the optimal original mode and image adjustment for each orig-
inal (it is called a job). After all the originals have finished being scanned, they can be copied at
one time.
Also, the original scanning source (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder or original glass) of
originals can be switched per job, and so, for example, after originals such as multiple A3 texts,
news clips, photographs in magazines and multiple A4 photographs with the appropriate set-
tings have finished being scanned, they can be copied in the scanned order in one go. And the
scanned data can be stored in e-Filing.
yUp to 1000 pages of originals are possible.
yAny number of jobs can be set until the total number of scanned original pages reaches
1000.
There are restrictions on the settings for JOB BUILD: Settings not available for JOB BUILD,
common settings which are set before scanning the first job and applied to all jobs, and change-
able settings for each job. See the following table to perform the setting.
Settings not available
for JOB BUILD
Common settings
for all jobs
Changeable settings
per each job
Automatic Paper Selection (APS)
Book to 2
Twin colour copy
Image editing
XY zoom
Cover copying
Sheet insertion mode
Magazine sort
Magazine sort & Saddle stitch
2IN1 / 4IN1
Full image
Image repeat
e-Filing/file
Mixed-size original
Paper size to be copied
Sort mode
Image shift
Book centre erase
Time stamp
Page number
Image direction in 2-sided
copying
Book <-> tablet
Photo zoom
Reproduction ratio
Automatic magnification selection
(Default setting for JOB BUILD)
Original size
Original mode
Colour mode
1-sided -> 1-sided / 2-sided ->
1-sided (or 1-sided -> 2-sided /
2-sided -> 2-sided) copying
Background adjustment
Sharpness
Edge erase
Dual-page
ADF / SADF
JOB BUILD 195
1
Place the originals of the 1st job.
yWhen an original is placed on the original glass, one page is regarded as one job.
yTo copy mixed-size originals using the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder, see
P.101 “Copying mixed-sized originals in one operation (mixed original size)”.
ySelect the drawer if you want to specify it.
2
Press the [EDIT] button to enter the edit menu. Then press the
[Next] button to switch the menu, and press the [JOB BUILD] but-
ton.
3
Press the [ENTER] button.
Read the brief description of JOB BUILD on the touch panel.
JOB BUILD is set and the basic menu is displayed.
5 USING THE EDITING FUNCTIONS
196 JOB BUILD
4
After “Press START button to copy after changing settings.”
appears, perform the settings for the 1st job and the common set-
tings for all jobs.
yPress the [SETTINGS] button to confirm the settings.
yTo change the settings, press the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button, and then start the pro-
cedure again from step 1.
5
Press the [START] button.
The scanning of the originals for the 1st job starts.
6
After “Press START button to copy after changing settings.”
appears, place the originals of the 2nd job. Perform the settings for
the 2nd job.
Note that copying will be performed in the same modes as those of the 1st job if the
settings are not changed.
yPress the [SETTINGS] button to confirm the settings.
7
Press the [START] button.
The scanning of the originals for the 2nd job starts.
yRepeat steps 6 to 7 until all the originals have finished being scanned.
8
After all the originals have finished being scanned, confirm the
number of copies on the menu and change if needed.
JOB BUILD 197
9
Press the [JOB FINISH] button on the basic menu.
The copying of the originals starts.
yWhen copy and e-Filing/file functions are set, storing starts.
5 USING THE EDITING FUNCTIONS
198 IMAGE DIRECTION
IMAGE DIRECTION
This function allows you to adjust the direction to ‘open toward the left’ when a portrait original
such as A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, etc., which is placed in a landscape direction, is copied under the
mode of “1-Sided Originals to 2-Sided Copies”.
This function is not necessary for copying in the direction of ‘open to top’.
When a 2-sided ‘open toward the left’ (Book) portrait A3, A4, A5, B4, B5 originals, etc. is copied
using this function with [2-Sided Originals to 1-Sided Copies], copies can be adjusted to the
same direction.
[IMAGE DIRECTION]:
1. Set
2. No setting
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Place the original(s).
3
Perform the setting of [1 -> 2 DUPLEX] (or [2 -> 1 SPLIT]).
P.129 “Duplex Copying”
4
Press the [EDIT] button to enter the edit menu. Then press the
[Next] button to switch the menu, and press the [IMAGE DIREC-
TION] button.
yThe direction of the copy is adjusted by this operation.
12
IMAGE DIRECTION 199
5
Press the [ENTER] button.
Select other copy modes as required.
6
Press the [START] button.
5 USING THE EDITING FUNCTIONS
200 BOOK - TABLET
BOOK - TABLET
When copying under the mode of 2-Sided Originals to 2-Sided-Copies, this function allows you
to rotate the back side of the original to be copied by 180º. It is useful when ‘open to left’ (Book)
originals need to be copied in ‘open to top’ (Tablet), and the opposite condition is available.
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Place the original(s).
3
Press the [EDIT] button to enter the edit menu. Then press the
[Next] button to switch the menu, and press the [BOOK <-> TAB-
LET] button.
y‘Open to left’ originals are copied in ‘open to top’ and ‘open to top’ originals are copied
in ‘open to left’ by this operation.
4
Press the [ENTER] button.
Select other copy modes as required.
5
Press the [START] button.
ADF / SADF 201
ADF / SADF
You can select the paper feeding mode when using the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder
(optional). There are two ways to feed originals.
yIn the single feed mode, set the originals one after another. Setting more than one original
could cause a tilted image or a paper jam.
yTo set different size originals, see P.101 “Copying mixed-sized originals in one operation
(mixed original size)”.
Continuous feed mode
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Press the [EDIT] button to enter the edit menu. Then press the
[Next] button to switch the menu, and press the [SADF] button.
yIf the [ADF] button is already displayed, the continuous feed mode is set. In this case,
skip to step 5.
3
Press the [ADF] button.
Select other copy modes as required.
Continuous feed mode: Originals placed on the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder
are continuously fed in after the [START] button is pressed. It is
useful to select this mode for copying multiple originals at one time.
(This is the initial setting at the time of the installation of the equip-
ment.)
Single feed mode: An original is automatically pulled in as soon as it is placed. It is
recommended to select this mode for copying originals one by one.
5 USING THE EDITING FUNCTIONS
202 ADF / SADF
4
Place the original(s) on the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder
(optional).
P.72 “Using the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (optional)
5
Press the [START] button.
Single feed mode
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Press the [EDIT] button to enter the edit menu. Then press the
[Next] button to switch the menu, and press the [ADF] button.
yIf the [SADF] button is already displayed, the single feed mode is set. In this case,
skip to step 4.
3
Press the [SADF] button.
Select other copy modes as required.
ADF / SADF 203
4
Place the originals one by one.
yThe original is automatically pulled in and the following menu is displayed.
If there are more originals, set them in the same way. (The same operation is performed
whether or not you press the [YES] button.)
5
After all originals have finished being scanned, press the
[FINISHED] button.
If the [FINISHED] button is not pressed, copying is started when the automatic function
clear is operated.
P.43 “Clearing functions selected
5 USING THE EDITING FUNCTIONS
204 FULL IMAGE
FULL IMAGE
The full image of an original can be copied. It is useful to select this mode for copying an original
with no loss of image.
1
Place paper in the drawer.
2
Place an original.
3
Press the Reduction/Enlargement button.
4
Specify each size of the original and the copy paper.
FULL IMAGE 205
5
Press the [EDIT] button to enter the edit menu. Then press the
[Next] button to switch the menu, and press the [FULL IMAGE] but-
ton.
yThe copied image size will be 1 to 5% smaller than the normal one.
ySelect other copy modes as required.
6
Press the [START] button.
5 USING THE EDITING FUNCTIONS
206 IMAGE REPEAT
IMAGE REPEAT
This function allows you to copy a specified area on an original repeatedly in a vertical direction.
The number of repeats can be specified from 2 to 8.
This function is available only for standard size originals.
When registering this function to a template ( P.238), disable the “AUTOMATIC START”. If
not, copies may not be made correctly because the original size is not detected.
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
When using this mode in bypass copying ( P.85), be sure to specify the paper size.
2
Press the [EDIT] button to enter the edit menu. Then press the
[Next] button to switch the menu, and press the [IMAGE REPEAT]
button.
3
Place an original with its face
up on the original glass.
Set the original with its face up and
bottom toward you and fit its top left
corner against that of the original glass
to align it with the original scales.
IMAGE REPEAT 207
Do not place heavy objects (4 kg or more) on the original glass and do not press on it
with force. Breaking the glass could injure you.
5
Key in the values read in step 4 for the specified area, and then
press the [SET] button. Set 4 values in order.
yTo correct the value which has been set, press the [RESET] button. Pressing it once
makes the highlighted field move one position upward. Highlight the field in which you
want to correct the value, and then key in the correct one.
4
Specify the area. Read the fol-
lowing 4 values of the left and
top scales.
The marks of the original scale have a
2 mm pitch.
X1: Distance from the top left to the left edge of the specified area
X2: Distance from the top left to the right edge of the specified area
Y1: Distance from the top left to the upper edge of the specified area
Y2: Distance from the top left to the lower edge of the specified area
5 USING THE EDITING FUNCTIONS
208 IMAGE REPEAT
6
Change the number of repeat using the [< 2] and [8 >] button, and
then press the [ENTER] button.
yCopying is repeated in the vertical direction.
yIf the repeated image runs off the specified paper size, the part run off will not be cop-
ied.
8
Press the [START] button.
7
Turn over the original.
ySet the original with its face down
and bottom toward you and fit its top
left corner against that of the original
glass.
ySelect other copy modes as
required.
6.e-FILING
This chapter explains how to use e-Filing and how to copy originals and store the data in a shared folder in
one go.
e-Filing ...................................................................................................................210
Creating User Boxes.............................................................................................212
Changing Data of User Boxes .............................................................................215
Deleting User Boxes .............................................................................................218
Storing Documents in e-Filing .............................................................................220
Printing Stored Documents..................................................................................225
Printing the whole document...........................................................................................................225
Test printing.....................................................................................................................................227
Printing the stored document after changing the settings ...............................................................228
Deleting Folders or Documents...........................................................................230
Appendix................................................................................................................232
Storing documents in the shared folder...........................................................................................232
6 e-FILING
210 e-Filing
e-Filing
This feature allows you to store, print and manage documents obtained by copying, printing from
a PC, scanning, receiving Fax and receiving Internet Fax. The document is stored into the hard
disc embedded in this equipment.
yTo use documents received by Fax in e-Filing, a Fax Unit is required.
yWhen the Data Overwrite Kit (optional) is installed, it may take time before e-Filing can be
used after the power is turned ON. This depends on the number of files in e-Filing.
yDelete the documents in e-Filing when they are no longer needed.
yThe e-Filing box in which highly confidential documents are stored must be password pro-
tected.
There are two kinds of e-Filing as follows.
Public box:
This is prepared as a default setting. This is used to store a shared document that can be
accessed by any users without restrictions.
User box:
Up to 200 boxes can be created. Passwords can be set for each user box.
Up to 100 folders per one box can be created. A maximum of 400 documents can be stored in
one folder. The maximum number of original pages is 200. (However, it may be restricted
depending on the amount of free space on the hard disc embedded in this equipment.)
An outline of e-Filing is as follows.
1. Store a document into e-Filing.
2. Add a printing setting to the stored document as required.
3. Print the document.
4. Use the document on the PC. (See the e-Filing Guide for details.)
HDD 3
2
1
4
e-Filing 211
yThe stored document in e-Filing can be downloaded to a client PC by using the “File
Downloader”.
yThe stored document in e-Filing can be imported as an image into the TWAIN-compatible
application by the TWAIN driver.
yYou can edit and back up the document, create a folder, etc. in the e-Filing using “TopAc-
cess”.
yThe available settings differ between when the operation is performed from the touch
panel of this equipment or using “TopAccess” from a client PC. See the e-Filing Guide for
details.
yWhen the preservation period for documents in e-Filing is specified, the stored docu-
ments will be deleted after this period has passed. You need to print the documents or
download them into a client PC using the “File Downloader”. See the e-Filing Guide for
details. (For setting the storing period of the documents in e-Filing, ask the network
administrator.)
yBe sure to back up the data stored in e-Filing regularly in case of a hard disc failure. See
the e-Filing Guide for details.
This chapter explains about when copied original data are stored to e-Filing. See the e-Filing
Guide for storing, printing and managing the document obtained by printing from a PC, scan-
ning, receiving fax and receiving Internet Fax (except for copying) and operating e-Filing via
network.
6 e-FILING
212 Creating User Boxes
Creating User Boxes
Up to 200 user boxes can be created. To prepare user boxes for different purposes enables you
to have efficient document management.
Folders can be created in each user box. Also, password can be set to each user box.
yYou can create folders using “TopAccess” from a client PC. See the e-Filing Guide for
details.
Set up a user box following the procedure below.
2
Select a blank box number between “001” and “200”, and then
press the [SETUP] button.
yIf the desired box is not displayed, press the [Prev] or [Next] button to switch the
menu.
yTo display the applicable menu immediately, key in the box number.
1
Press the [e-FILING] button on
the control panel.
Creating User Boxes 213
3
Press the [BOX NAME] button, and then enter the box name.
When the [BOX NAME] button is pressed, the letter entry menu ( P.44) is displayed.
Up to 32 letters can be entered.
To set the password, proceed to step 4. If not, skip to step 6.
4
Key in the password in “Password” as required, and then press the
[SET] button.
yBe sure to key in the 5-digit password.
y* (asterisk) is displayed in “Password” when the password is entered.
yTo correct the entered password, press the [CLEAR] button on the control panel.
yWhen the [SET] button is pressed, “Retype Password” becomes highlighted.
5
Key in the password in “Retype Password”.
y * (asterisk) is displayed in “Retype Password” when the password is entered.
yTo correct the entered password, press the [CLEAR] button on the control panel.
6 e-FILING
214 Creating User Boxes
6
Press the [ENTER] button.
The user box is created.
Changing Data of User Boxes 215
Changing Data of User Boxes
Created user boxes and passwords can be changed.
You cannot change the folder name using the control panel of this equipment. It can be changed
using “TopAccess” from a client PC. See the e-Filing Guide for details.
2
Select the desired box, and then press the [EDIT] button.
yIf the desired box is not displayed, press the [Prev] or [Next] button to switch the
menu.
yTo display the applicable menu immediately, key in the box number.
3
Key in the password (5 digits) for the selected box, and then press
the [ENTER] button.
If no password was set when the box was created, skip to step 4.
1
Press the [e-FILING] button on
the control panel.
6 e-FILING
216 Changing Data of User Boxes
4
Enter the new box name.
When [BOX NAME] is pressed, the letter entry menu ( P.44) is displayed. A box name
can contain up to 32 letters.
5
Key in the new password in “Password”, and then press the [SET]
button.
yBe sure to key in the 5-digit password.
y* (asterisk) is displayed in “Password” when the password is entered.
yTo correct the entered password, press the [CLEAR] button on the control panel.
yWhen the [SET] button is pressed, “Retype Password” becomes highlighted.
6
Key in the password in “Retype Password”.
y* (asterisk) is displayed in “Retype Password” when the password is entered.
yTo correct the entered password, press the [CLEAR] button on the control panel.
Changing Data of User Boxes 217
7
Press the [ENTER] button.
The box settings are updated.
6 e-FILING
218 Deleting User Boxes
Deleting User Boxes
Unnecessary user boxes can be deleted. All folders and documents in the user boxes are also
deleted.
Public box cannot be deleted.
2
Select the box you want to delete, and then press the [DELETE] but-
ton.
yIf the desired box is not displayed on the menu, press the [Prev] or [Next] button to
switch the menu.
yTo display the applicable menu immediately, key in the box number.
1
Press the [e-FILING] button on
the control panel.
Deleting User Boxes 219
3
Key in the password (5 digits) for the selected box, and then press
the [ENTER] button.
If no password was set when the box was created, skip to step 4.
4
“Are you sure you want to delete this box?” appears. Press the
[Yes] button to delete the box.
The box is deleted.
6 e-FILING
220 Storing Documents in e-Filing
Storing Documents in e-Filing
Scanned original data can be stored in e-Filing. The copy mode settings will be saved with the e-
Filing document. You can copy originals and store the data at one time. After storing the original
data, you can print them out at any time.
yThere are two types of e-Filing, public box and user boxes. To store the data in a user box,
you need to set it up in advance. ( P.212 “Creating User Boxes”)
yThe data scanned with the scanning function can be also stored in e-Filing. The stored data
can be downloaded to the client PC as a JPEG, PDF or TIFF file. For details, refer to the e-
Filing Guide.
1
Place the original(s).
yUp to 100 folders can be created in one e-Filing, and a maximum of 400 documents
can be stored in one folder. The maximum number of original pages is 200. (However
this may be restricted depending on the amount of free space of the hard disc in this
equipment.)
ySet the copy mode as required.
yTwin colour or mono colour Images cannot be saved in e-Filing.
2
Press the [E-FILING/FILE] button to enter the e-Filing/file menu.
3
Press the [STORE TO E-FILING] button.
Storing Documents in e-Filing 221
4
Press the [BOX/FOLDER] button.
5
Select the box in which you want to store the document, and then
press the [ENTER] button.
yIf the desired box is not displayed on the menu, press the [Prev] or [Next] button to
switch the menu.
yTo display the applicable menu immediately, key in the box number.
When the password entry menu is displayed
When the password entry menu is displayed, the password is set in the selected user
box. Key in the password and press the [ENTER] button.
6 e-FILING
222 Storing Documents in e-Filing
6
The document list in the selected box is displayed. Press the
[ENTER] button to store in this box.
To store the document in the folder
To store the document in the folder, select the folder to be stored, press the [OPEN
FOLDER] button. The document list in the selected folder is displayed. Press the
[ENTER] button to store in this folder.
yIf you want to close the folder and go back to the box above, press the [CLOSE
FOLDER] button.
yCreating the folder can be performed from the client PC using “TopAccess”. For
details, see e-Filing Guide.
7
Press the [DOCUMENT NAME] button, and then enter the document
name.
When the [DOCUMENT NAME] button is pressed, the letter entry menu ( P. 4 4 ) i s
displayed. Up to 64 letters can be entered.
Storing Documents in e-Filing 223
8
Press the [ENTER] button.
9
“PRINT THIS DOCUMENT?” appears. Press the [YES] button to
store and print it out at one time.
If you want to store the document without printing it, press the [NO] button.
6 e-FILING
224 Storing Documents in e-Filing
10
Press the [START] button.
The reading and storing of the documents starts.
When the original is placed on the original glass or on the Reversing Automatic Docu-
ment Feeder (optional) in the Single original feeding mode, the following menu is dis-
played. Setting the original on the original glass: When the next original is placed, the
[YES] button and then the [START] button are pressed, storing of the document starts.
Setting the original on the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder in the single original
feeding mode: When the next original is placed on the Reversing Automatic Document
Feeder, storing of the document starts. After the last page has finished being scanned,
press the [FINISHED] button.
Printing Stored Documents 225
Printing Stored Documents
Stored documents can be printed out. You can also print out a part of a document and change
the setting in the finishing mode or the like before printing the documents.
Printing the whole document
All pages of the document are printed. If printing multiple copies is desired, see P.228 “Print-
ing the stored document after changing the settings”.
2
Select the box in which the desired printing document is stored,
and then press the [ENTER] button.
yIf the desired box is not displayed on the menu, press the [Prev] or [Next] button to
switch the menu.
yTo display the applicable menu immediately, key in the box number.
3
Key in the password (5 digits) for the selected box, and then press
the [ENTER] button.
If no password was set when the box was registered, skip to step 4.
1
Press the [e-FILING] button on
the control panel.
6 e-FILING
226 Printing Stored Documents
4
Select the document to be printed.
To print a document in the folder, select the folder in which you want to print the
document out and press the [OPEN FOLDER] button. Select the desired document on
the menu.
5
Press the [PRINT] button.
Printing starts.
To stop printing a stored document during the operation
Select the job you want to stop from the print job menu or scan job menu, and then press the
[DELETE] button. For details, see P.274 “Job Status”.
Printing Stored Documents 227
Test printing
A part of a document of several pages can be printed out.
1
Select the document to be printed according to steps 1 to 4 of
P.225 “Printing the whole document”.
2
Press the [TEST PRINT] button.
3
Key in the number of the last page and press the [SET] button. Then
key in the number of the first page.
yTo correct the pages, press the [CLEAR] button on the control panel.
yTo print all pages, press the [ALL PAGES] button.
4
Press the [PRINT] button.
Printing of the set pages starts.
6 e-FILING
228 Printing Stored Documents
To stop printing a stored document during the operation
Select the job you want to stop from the print job menu or scan job menu, and then press the
[DELETE] button. For details, see P.274 “Job Status”.
Printing the stored document after changing the settings
The following settings are available before the stored document is printed.
1. Paper source (Press the drawer icon to be set as a paper source. However, the paper in the
drawer selected for the paper source is used only when its size and type correspond to those
of the documents in the box.)
2. Number of printings (Key them in.)
3. Simplex printing / duplex printing
4. Finishing mode (Selecting the mode is limited depending on the installed optional equip-
ment.)
5. Paper exit (Available when the finisher (optional) is installed)
6. Image shift position
7. Added date and time position
8. Page number position
1
Select the document to be printed according to steps 1 to 4 of
P.225 “Printing the whole document”.
2
Press the [SETTINGS] button.
231
5
4
6
7
8
Printing Stored Documents 229
3
Set the printing modes as required.
See the eight items mentioned above for the setting mode. To set items 3 to 8, press the
button and set the required setting on the menu.
4
Press the [PRINT] button.
Printing starts.
To stop printing a stored document during the operation
Select the job you want to stop from the print job menu or scan job menu, and then press the
[DELETE] button. For details, see P.274 “Job Status”.
6 e-FILING
230 Deleting Folders or Documents
Deleting Folders or Documents
Unnecessary folders or documents can be deleted. If a folder is deleted, all documents in the
folder are also deleted.
2
Select the box in which you want to delete the folder or document,
and then press the [ENTER] button.
yIf the desired box is not displayed on the menu, press the [Prev] or [Next] button to
switch the menu.
yTo display the applicable menu immediately, key in the box number.
3
Key in the password (5 digits) for the selected box, and then press
the [ENTER] button.
If no password was set when the box was created, skip to step 4.
1
Press the [e-FILING] button on
the control panel.
Deleting Folders or Documents 231
4
Select the folder or document to be deleted, and then press the
[DELETE] button.
To delete a document in the folder
To delete a document in the folder, select the folder in which you want to delete the
document and press the [OPEN FOLDER] button. Select the desired document and
press the [DELETE] button.
5
“Are you sure you want to delete this folder?” or “Are you sure you
want to delete this document?” appears. Press the [Yes] button to
perform deletion.
yThe folder or document is deleted.
yIf a folder is deleted, all the documents in the folder are also deleted.
6 e-FILING
232 Appendix
Appendix
Storing documents in the shared folder
Scanned original data can be stored in the shared folder. You can copy originals and store the
data at the same time.
yData can be stored in the TIFF or PDF format.
yColour originals are stored in the black mode. They can be stored in the colour mode using
the scanning function.
yData can be stored in the [MFP LOCAL] (hard disc in the equipment) as well as [REMOTE 1]
and [REMOTE 2] (hard disc of a computer connected with the equipment in the network).
To set “REMOTE 1” and “REMOTE 2”, ask your network administrator.
1
Place the original(s).
2
Press the [E-FILING/FILE] button on the basic menu to enter the
e-Filing/file menu.
3
Press the [COPY & FILE] button.
Appendix 233
4
Press the [FILE NAME] button.
When the [FILE NAME] button is pressed, the letter entry menu ( P.44 “Setting letters”)
is displayed. Up to 45 letters can be entered.
5
Select the destination you want to store the data.
yAny two of the destinations [MFP LOCAL], [REMOTE 1] and [REMOTE 2] can be
selected at one time.
yIf you press the [REMOTE 1] or [REMOTE 2] button, you may need to specify the
computer in which you want to store the data. See “6. Copy & File” in the Scanning
Guide for details.
6 e-FILING
234 Appendix
6
Select the format in which the data are stored.
PDF (MULTI)
Scanned originals are stored as one PDF file.
PDF (SINGLE)
A folder is created and each page of the scanned original is stored into this folder
separately as a PDF file.
E.g.: A three-page original is stored as three PDF files.
TIFF (MULTI)
Scanned originals are stored as one TIFF file.
TIFF (SINGLE)
A folder is created and each page of the scanned original is stored into this folder
separately as a TIFF file.
E.g.: A three-page original is stored as three TIFF files.
7
Press the [ENTER] button.
Appendix 235
8
Press the [START] button.
yThe scanning, storing and copying of the documents starts.
yAll the documents are stored and copied in the black mode.
When the original is placed on the original glass or on the Reversing Automatic Docu-
ment Feeder (optional) in the single original feeding mode, the following menu is dis-
played. Setting the original on the original glass: When the next original is placed, the
[YES] button and then the [START] button are pressed, storing of the document starts.
Setting the original on the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder in the single original
feeding mode: When the next original is placed on the Reversing Automatic Document
Feeder, storing of the document starts. After the last page has finished being scanned,
press the [FINISHED] button.
6 e-FILING
236 Appendix
7.TEMPLATE
This chapter explains how to use templates.
Template ................................................................................................................238
Template in “Useful Template”.........................................................................................................238
Registering User Groups and Templates............................................................240
Registering a template in the public template group .......................................................................240
Registering the new user group ......................................................................................................246
Registering a template in the user group ........................................................................................249
Changing Data of User Groups and Templates..................................................254
Changing the data of a user group..................................................................................................254
Changing the data of a template.....................................................................................................257
Recalling Templates .............................................................................................262
When recalling a template in a public group ...................................................................................262
When recalling a template in a user group......................................................................................264
Deleting User Groups or Templates ....................................................................267
Deleting a user group......................................................................................................................267
Deleting a template .........................................................................................................................269
7 TEMPLATE
238 Template
Template
A combination of functions frequently used can be registered as a template and recalled as
required. Templates can be used with the copy, scanning and Fax functions.
yTo use Fax functions, the optional Fax Unit is required.
The following illustration shows the outline of a template function.
1. Register the combination of the functions to the template.
2. Place the original.
3. Recall the desired template, and then make a copy.
Template in “Useful Template”
In this equipment, 12 templates are included by default. They are registered to be available in
the user group number 001 “Useful Template”.
To recall the template, see P.264 “When recalling a template in a user group”.
HDD
90 %
2004.3.15
2004.3.15
2004.3.15
2004.3.15
3
1
2
Template 239
Template using the copying function
Template using the scanning function
Template using the e-Filing function
*1 The functions not described in the “Function” field are set by default.
Button Function *1
“1-sided original -> 1-sided copy” is performed in the auto colour and 2IN1
mode.
Reduction copy by 95% is performed in the auto colour mode.
Mixed-size originals are copied in the auto colour mode.
Twin colour (RED&BLACK) copy is made.
Button Function *1
A 1-sided original is scanned in the full colour and text mode, then stored
in the shared folder of this equipment as a high compression PDF file
(multi).
A 2-sided original is scanned in the full colour and text mode, then stored
in the shared folder of this equipment as a high-compression PDF file
(multi).
A 1-sided original is scanned in the black and text mode at 400 dpi resolu-
tion, then stored in the shared folder of this equipment as a high-compres-
sion PDF file (multi).
A 1-sided original is scanned in the auto colour and text mode at 300 dpi
resolution, then stored in the e-Filing box of this equipment.
Button Function *1
Data are read in the auto colour and text/photo mode and with “1-sided
original -> 1-sided copy”, then stored in the e-Filing box. Data are not cop-
ied.
Data are read in the auto colour and text/photo mode and with “2-sided
original -> 1-sided copy”, then stored in the e-Filing box. Data are not cop-
ied.
Data are read in the auto colour and text/photo mode and with “1-sided
original -> 1-sided copy” using the dual-page mode, then stored in the e-
Filing box. Data are also copied.
“1-sided original -> 2-sided copy” is performed in the auto colour and text/
photo mode, then the data are stored in the e-Filing box. Data are also
copied.
7 TEMPLATE
240 Registering User Groups and Templates
Registering User Groups and Templates
A template can be registered either in “PUBLIC TEMPLATE GROUP” or “USER GROUP”
depending on your purpose. Passwords can be set to restrict the unauthorized use of a tem-
plate.
PUBLIC TEMPLATE GROUP:
This is prepared as a default setting. Anyone can use a template registered in this group.
It is useful if the setting combinations of functions frequently used throughout the company or
organization are registered in this group. Up to 60 templates can be registered.
When registering a template in the public template group, keying in the Admin Password is
required.
USER GROUP:
Up to 200 groups can be registered. It is useful if you register each department, section or per-
son as a user group. Up to 60 templates can be registered in each group. Passwords can be set
for the user groups.
“Useful Template” is registered to be available in user group number 001.
Registering a template in the public template group
1
Set every function you want to include in the combination.
e.g.: Setting “Image shift”, “90% reduction” and “10 sets of copies” of the copy function.
3
Press the [REGISTRATION] button on the touch panel.
2
Press the [TEMPLATE] button
on the control panel.
Registering User Groups and Templates 241
4
Press the [PUBLIC TEMPLATE GROUP], and then press the
[ENTER] button.
5
Press the [PASSWORD] button.
The letter entry menu is displayed.
6
Key in the Admin Password (6 to 10 digits) with the keys on the let-
ter entry menu and the digital keys, and then press the [ENTER]
button.
If an incorrect Admin Password is entered three times in a row, this equipment will not be
able to be operated for approx. 30 sec. In that case, wait until it becomes available and
then enter the correct Admin Password again.
The corresponding buttons of the template registered in the public template group are
displayed.
7 TEMPLATE
242 Registering User Groups and Templates
7
Press the blank key, and then press the [SAVE] button.
8
Press the [NAME1] button and the [NAME2] button, and then enter
the template name.
y[NAME 1] is displayed on the upper side and [NAME 2] is displayed on the lower side
of the template button. Enter [NAME 1] and/or [NAME 2]. When both are entered,
[NAME 1] is displayed on the upper side and [NAME 2] on the lower side of the but-
ton.
yWhen the [NAME 1] or [NAME 2] button is pressed, the letter entry menu ( P. 4 4 ) i s
displayed. Up to 11 letters can be entered.
yThe following symbols cannot be used for [NAME 1] and [NAME 2].
["], [=], [|], [*], [<], [>], [?], [+], [[], []], [;], [:], [/], [\], [,], [.]
Registering User Groups and Templates 243
9
Press the [USER NAME] button, and then enter the user name of
the template as required.
When the [USER NAME] button is pressed, the letter entry menu ( P.44) is displayed.
Up to 30 letters can be entered.
To set the password, proceed to step 10. If not, skip to step 12.
10
Key in the password in “Password” as required, and then press the
[SET] button.
yBe sure to key in the 5-digit password.
y * (asterisk) is displayed in “Password” when the password is entered.
yTo correct the entered password, press the [CLEAR] button on the control panel.
yWhen the [SET] button is pressed, “Retype Password” becomes highlighted.
7 TEMPLATE
244 Registering User Groups and Templates
11
Key in the password in “Retype Password”, and then press the
[ENTER] button.
y* (asterisk) is displayed in “Retype Password” when the password is entered.
yTo correct the entered password, press the [CLEAR] button on the control panel.
12
Select whether to enable “AUTOMATIC START” or not when the
template is recalled.
Press the [ENABLE] or [DISABLE] button.
When [ENABLE] is selected, the icon is added to the template button. (The operation
of the setting functions is automatically started by pressing the template button with the
icon when the template is recalled. However, if a password is set for the template, you
need to key it in when an operation with the function set to the template is performed,
though automatic start is enabled.)
Registering User Groups and Templates 245
13
Press the [SAVE] button.
The screen returns to the one of step 1, which is the menu before the [TEMPLATE]
button on the control panel is pressed.
7 TEMPLATE
246 Registering User Groups and Templates
Registering the new user group
A template can be registered continuously after a new user group has been registered. When
you want to register a template continuously, set every function you want to include in the com-
bination, and then perform step 1.
2
Press the [REGISTRATION] button on the touch panel.
3
Select an unregistered user group between “002” and “200”, and
then press the [ENTER] button.
yIf the desired user group is not displayed on the menu, press the [Prev] or [Next] but-
ton to switch the menu.
yTo display the applicable menu immediately, key in the user group number.
1
Press the [TEMPLATE] button
on the control panel.
Registering User Groups and Templates 247
4
Press the [NAME] button, and then enter the user group name.
When the [NAME] button is pressed, the letter entry menu ( P.44) is displayed. Up to
20 letters can be entered.
5
Press the [USER NAME] button, and then enter the user name of
the user group as required.
When the [USER NAME] button is pressed, the letter entry menu ( P.44) is displayed.
Up to 30 letters can be entered.
To set the password, proceed to step 6. If not, skip to step 8.
6
Key in the password in “Password” as required, and then press the
[SET] button.
yBe sure to key in the 5-digit password.
y * (asterisk) is displayed in “Password” when the password is entered.
yTo correct the entered password, press the [CLEAR] button on the control panel.
yWhen the [SET] button is pressed, “Retype Password” becomes highlighted.
7 TEMPLATE
248 Registering User Groups and Templates
7
Key in the password in “Retype Password”, and then press the
[ENTER] button.
y* (asterisk) is displayed in “Retype Password” when the password is entered.
yTo correct the entered password, press the [CLEAR] button on the control panel.
8
Press the [ENTER] button.
yThe user group is registered and the registration menu for template appears.
yIf you want to register a template continuously, start from step 6 on p.235.
yTo end only with the user group registration, press the [TEMPLATE] button on the
control panel. The screen will return to the basic menu.
Registering User Groups and Templates 249
Registering a template in the user group
1
Set every function you want to include in the combination.
e.g.: Setting “Image shift”, “90% reduction” and “10 sets of copies” of the copy function.
3
Press the [REGISTRATION] button on the touch panel.
4
Select the desired user group, and then press the [ENTER] button.
If the desired user group is not displayed, press the [Prev] or [Next] button to switch the
menu.
2
Press the [TEMPLATE] button
on the control panel.
7 TEMPLATE
250 Registering User Groups and Templates
5
Key in the password (5 digits) for the selected user group, and then
press the [ENTER] button.
If no password was set when the user group was registered, skip to step 6.
6
The corresponding buttons of the template registered in the user
group are displayed. Press the blank key, and then press the
[SAVE] button.
Registering User Groups and Templates 251
7
Press the [NAME1] button and the [NAME2] button, and then enter
the template name.
y[NAME 1] is displayed in the upper side and [NAME 2] is displayed in the lower side
of the template button. Enter [NAME 1] and/or [NAME 2]. When both are entered,
[NAME 1] is displayed in the upper side and [NAME 2] is displayed in the lower side
of the button.
yWhen the [NAME 1] or [NAME 2] button is pressed, the letter entry menu ( P. 4 4 ) i s
displayed. Up to 11 letters can be entered.
yThe following symbols cannot be used for [NAME 1] and [NAME 2].
["], [=], [|], [*], [<], [>], [?], [+], [[], []], [;], [:], [/], [\], [,], [.]
8
Press the [USER NAME] button, and then enter the user name of
the template as required.
When the [USER NAME] button is pressed, the letter entry menu ( P.44) is displayed.
Up to 30 letters can be entered.
To set the password, proceed to step 9. If not, skip to step 11.
7 TEMPLATE
252 Registering User Groups and Templates
9
Key in the password in “Password” as required, and then press the
[SET] button.
yBe sure to key in the 5-digit password.
y* (asterisk) is displayed in “Password” when the password is entered.
yTo correct the entered password, press the [CLEAR] button on the control panel.
yWhen the [SET] button is pressed, “Retype Password” becomes highlighted.
10
Key in the password in “Retype Password”, and then press the
[ENTER] button.
y* (asterisk) is displayed in “Retype Password” when the password is entered.
yTo correct the entered password, press the [CLEAR] button on the control panel.
Registering User Groups and Templates 253
11
Select whether to enable “AUTOMATIC START” or not when the
template is recalled.
Press the [ENABLE] or [DISABLE] button.
When [ENABLE] is selected, the icon is added to the template button. (The operation
of the setting functions is automatically started by pressing the template button with the
icon when the template is recalled. However, if a password is set for the template, you
need to key it in when an operation with the function set to the template is performed,
though automatic start is enabled.)
12
Press the [SAVE] button.
The screen returns to the one of step 1, which is the menu before the [TEMPLATE]
button on the control panel is pressed.
7 TEMPLATE
254 Changing Data of User Groups and Templates
Changing Data of User Groups and Templates
Registered names, user names and passwords of user groups or templates, and the automatic
start setting of a template can be changed.
The data of a public group cannot be changed from the control panel, but from “TopAccess”. For
details, see the TopAccess Guide.
Changing the data of a user group
2
Press the [REGISTRATION] button on the touch panel.
3
Select the user group you want to change, and then press the
[EDIT] button.
yIf the desired user group is not displayed on the menu, press the [Prev] or [Next] but-
ton to switch the menu.
yTo display the applicable menu immediately, key in the user group number.
1
Press the [TEMPLATE] button
on the control panel.
Changing Data of User Groups and Templates 255
4
Key in the password (5 digits) for the selected user group, and then
press the [ENTER] button.
If no password was set when the user group was registered, skip to step 5.
5
Press the [NAME] button, and then enter the new name of the user
group.
When the [NAME] button is pressed, the letter entry menu ( P.44) is displayed. Up to
20 letters can be entered.
6
Press the [USER NAME] button, and then enter the new user name
of the user group.
When the [USER NAME] button is pressed, the letter entry menu ( P.44) is displayed.
Up to 30 letters can be entered.
7 TEMPLATE
256 Changing Data of User Groups and Templates
7
Key in the new password in “Password”, and then press the [SET]
button.
yBe sure to key in the 5-digit password.
y* (asterisk) is displayed in “Password” when the password is entered.
yTo correct the entered password, press the [CLEAR] button on the control panel.
yWhen the [SET] button is pressed, “Retype Password” becomes highlighted.
8
Key in the password in “Retype Password”, and then press the
[ENTER] button.
y* (asterisk) is displayed in “Retype Password” when the password is entered.
yTo correct the entered password, press the [CLEAR] button on the control panel.
9
Press the [ENTER] button.
The data of the user group are changed.
Changing Data of User Groups and Templates 257
Changing the data of a template
2
Press the [REGISTRATION] button on the touch panel.
3
Select the group in which the template to be changed was regis-
tered, and then press the [ENTER] button.
yIf the desired user group is not displayed on the menu, press the [Prev] or [Next] but-
ton to switch the menu.
yTo display the applicable menu immediately, key in the user group number.
1
Press the [TEMPLATE] button
on the control panel.
7 TEMPLATE
258 Changing Data of User Groups and Templates
4
Enter the following password, and then press the [ENTER] button.
When the public group is selected:
Press the [PASSWORD] button, and then key in the Admin Password (6 to 10 digits) with
the keys on the letter entry menu and the digital keys.
If an incorrect Admin Password is entered three times in a row, this equipment will not be
able to be operated for approx. 30 sec. In that case, wait until it becomes available and
then enter the correct Admin Password again.
When the user group is selected:
Key in the password (5 digits) for the selected user group. (If no password was set when
the user group was registered, skip to step 5.)
5
Select the template to be changed, and then press the [EDIT] but-
ton.
If the desired template is not displayed on the menu, press the [Prev] or [Next] button to
switch the menu.
Changing Data of User Groups and Templates 259
6
Key in the password (5 digits) for the selected template, and then
press the [ENTER] button.
If no password was set when the template was registered, skip to step 7.
7
Press the [NAME1] button and the [NAME2] button, and then enter
the new name of the template.
yWhen the [NAME 1] or [NAME 2] button is pressed, the letter entry menu ( P. 4 4 ) i s
displayed. Up to 11 letters can be entered.
yThe following symbols cannot be used for [NAME 1] and [NAME 2].
["], [=], [|], [*], [<], [>], [?], [+], [[], []], [;], [:], [/], [\], [,], [.]
7 TEMPLATE
260 Changing Data of User Groups and Templates
8
Press the [USER NAME] button, and then enter the new user name
of the template.
When the [USER NAME] button is pressed, the letter entry menu ( P.44) is displayed.
Up to 30 letters can be entered.
9
Key in the new password in “Password”, and then press the [SET]
button.
yBe sure to key in the 5-digit password.
y* (asterisk) is displayed in “Password” when the password is entered.
yTo correct the entered password, press the [CLEAR] button on the control panel.
yWhen the [SET] button is pressed, “Retype Password” becomes highlighted.
10
Key in the password in “Retype Password”, and then press the
[ENTER] button.
y* (asterisk) is displayed in “Retype Password” when the password is entered.
yTo correct the entered password, press the [CLEAR] button on the control panel.
Changing Data of User Groups and Templates 261
11
Change the setting of “AUTOMATIC START” for recalling the tem-
plate.
Press the [ENABLE] or [DISABLE] button.
When [ENABLE] is selected, the icon is added to the template button. (The operation
of the setting functions is automatically started by pressing the template button with the
icon when the template is recalled. However, if a password is set for the template, you
need to key it in when an operation with the function set to the template is performed,
though automatic start is enabled.)
12
Press the [ENTER] button.
The data of the template are changed.
7 TEMPLATE
262 Recalling Templates
Recalling Templates
When a template is recalled, the registered setting functions of the template are reflected in the
equipment.
If [ENABLE] is selected for “AUTOMATIC START” when the template is registered, operation of
the setting functions is automatically started by pressing the template button.
When recalling a template in a public group
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Place the original(s).
4
Press the [PUBLIC TEMPLATE GROUP].
3
Press the [TEMPLATE] button
on the control panel.
Recalling Templates 263
5
Press the desired template button.
yIf the desired template is not displayed on the menu, press the [Prev] or [Next] button
to switch the menu.
yIf you press the template button with the icon, the operation of the registered set-
ting functions is automatically started.
6
Key in the password (5 digits) for the selected template, and then
press the [ENTER] button.
If no password was set when the template was registered, skip to step 7.
7
Confirm that “Updated the template setting” appears on the menu.
yThe message appears for approx. 3 seconds.
ySelect other copy modes as required.
8
Press the [START] button.
7 TEMPLATE
264 Recalling Templates
When recalling a template in a user group
1
Place paper in the drawer(s).
2
Place the original(s).
4
Select the user group in which the template to be recalled is regis-
tered.
yIf the desired user group is not displayed on the menu, press the [Prev] or [Next] but-
ton to switch the menu.
yTo display the applicable menu immediately, key in the user group number.
3
Press the [TEMPLATE] button
on the control panel.
Recalling Templates 265
5
Key in the password (5 digits) for the selected user group, and then
press the [ENTER] button.
If no password was set when the user group was registered, skip to step 6.
6
Press the desired template button.
yIf the desired template is not displayed on the menu, press the [Prev] or [Next] button
to switch the menu.
yIf you press the template button with the icon, the operation of the registered set-
ting functions is automatically started.
7
Key in the password (5 digits) for the selected template, and then
press the [ENTER] button.
If no password was set when the template was registered, skip to step 8.
7 TEMPLATE
266 Recalling Templates
8
Confirm that “Updated the template setting” appears on the menu.
yThe message appears for approx. 3 seconds.
ySelect other copy modes as required.
9
Press the [START] button.
Deleting User Groups or Templates 267
Deleting User Groups or Templates
Unnecessary user groups and templates can be deleted. If a user group is deleted, all templates
in the user group are also deleted.
Deleting a user group
2
Press the [REGISTRATION] button on the touch panel.
3
Select the user group you want to delete, and then press the
[DELETE] button.
yIf the desired user group is not displayed on the menu, press the [Prev] or [Next] but-
ton to switch the menu.
yTo display the applicable menu immediately, key in the user group number.
1
Press the [TEMPLATE] button
on the control panel.
7 TEMPLATE
268 Deleting User Groups or Templates
4
Key in the password (5 digits) for the selected user group, and then
press the [ENTER] button.
If no password was set when the user group was registered, skip to step 5.
5
“DELETE OK?” appears. Press the [DELETE] button.
The selected user group is deleted.
Deleting User Groups or Templates 269
Deleting a template
2
Press the [REGISTRATION] button on the touch panel.
3
Select the group in which the template to be deleted is registered,
and then press the [ENTER] button.
yIf the desired user group is not displayed on the menu, press the [Prev] or [Next] but-
ton to switch the menu.
yTo display the applicable menu immediately, key in the user group number.
1
Press the [TEMPLATE] button
on the control panel.
7 TEMPLATE
270 Deleting User Groups or Templates
4
Enter the following password, and then press the [ENTER] button.
When the public group is selected:
Press the [PASSWORD] button, and then key in the Admin Password (6 to 10 digits) with
the keys on the letter entry menu and the digital keys.
If an incorrect Admin Password is entered three times in a row, this equipment will not be
able to be operated for approx. 30 sec. In that case, wait until it becomes available and
then enter the correct Admin Password again.
When the user group is selected:
Key in the password (5 digits) for the selected user group. (If no password was set when
the user group was registered, skip to step 5.)
5
Select the template you want to delete, and then press the
[DELETE] button.
If the desired template is not displayed on the menu, press the [Prev] or [Next] button to
switch the menu.
Deleting User Groups or Templates 271
6
Key in the password (5 digits) for the selected template, and then
press the [ENTER] button.
If no password was set when the template was registered, skip to step 7.
7
“DELETE OK?” appears. Press the [DELETE] button.
The selected template is deleted.
7 TEMPLATE
272 Deleting User Groups or Templates
8.JOB STATUS
This chapter explains how to confirm the status of jobs in waiting, the status of performed jobs, and so on.
The error codes are also explained.
Job Status..............................................................................................................274
Confirming Print Job Status ................................................................................275
Print jobs .........................................................................................................................................275
Proof print jobs ................................................................................................................................279
Private print jobs .............................................................................................................................282
When using department codes .......................................................................................................287
USB print.........................................................................................................................................290
Confirming Scan Job Status................................................................................295
Log List..................................................................................................................296
Confirming job history in log list ......................................................................................................297
Registering into address book from log lists ...................................................................................301
Printing journals (send/receive log list) ...........................................................................................303
Print Status Display ..............................................................................................304
Releasing print job errors ................................................................................................................304
Error Code .............................................................................................................307
8JOB STATUS
274 Job Status
Job Status
When you press the [JOB STATUS] button on the control panel, the job status menu is dis-
played. The following information can be confirmed on this menu.
yStatus of jobs (print, Fax, Internet Fax and scan) in waiting
yLog list of jobs (print, sending/receiving, scan) performed
yPrint status
You can also start, pause, release, delete and move the job which is in waiting.
For the status confirmation of Fax jobs, see the Operator’s Manual for Facsimile Function. (The
FAX Unit (optional) is necessary for the Fax functions.)
In addition, you can print PDF or JPEG files stored in a USB device. (USB print)
When the equipment is managed under the user management function ( P.47), enter the user
information (e.g. user name, password) before pressing the [JOB STATUS] button.
Confirming Print Job Status 275
Confirming Print Job Status
You can confirm the status of the print job. The following information is displayed in a list.
User Name: Name of user for whom the job was registered
Date, Time: Date and time the job was registered
Paper: Paper size to be printed
Pages: Number of pages to be printed
Sets: Number of sets to be printed
Status: Status of jobs ("Scheduled" is displayed for the scheduled print.)
4 jobs are displayed in 1 page. Up to 250 pages (1000 jobs) can be displayed. When you want to
confirm the 5th and following jobs, press the [Next] button, and when you want to return to the
previous page, press the [Prev] button.
Print jobs
Copying and printing of the document, and printing of an E-mail, etc. are called print jobs.
Print jobs can be deleted, paused and released, moved, and printed on the print job list.
Displaying print job list
1
Press the [JOB STATUS] but-
ton on the control panel.
The print job list is displayed.
8JOB STATUS
276 Confirming Print Job Status
Deleting print jobs
1
Select the job you want to delete on the print job list, then press the
[DELETE] button.
If the subject job is not displayed on the page, press the [Prev] or [Next] button to switch
the page.
2
“Delete OK?” appears. Press the [DELETE] button.
The job is deleted.
Confirming Print Job Status 277
Pausing print jobs
The 11th job or later counting from the one in progress can be paused.
1
Select the job you want to pause on the print job list, then press the
[PAUSE] button.
yWhen the [PAUSE] button is pressed, the display of this button changes to
[RESUME].
yWhen the job is paused, the next job is started.
Releasing print job
Press the [RESUME] button. A job once paused will not be printed out unless the
[RESUME] button is pressed.
8JOB STATUS
278 Confirming Print Job Status
Moving print jobs
The job in waiting can be moved to a specified position. However, this is available only at the
11th job or later counting from the one in progress.
1
Select the job you want to move on the print job list, then press the
[MOVE] button.
If the corresponding job is not displayed on the page, press the [Prev] or [Next] button to
switch the page.
2
Select the position where you want to move the job. (The job comes
right under the job you selected on the list.)
Confirming Print Job Status 279
Proof print jobs
“Proof print” is a function to print only 1 set as a proof print when you print more than one set of
documents from a client PC on the network before you print out all the sets of the documents.
You can check this proof print and then select whether you print the rest of the documents or quit
printing to change the setting on the proof print job list. If you want to print the rest, you can
change the number of printouts.
For details of proof print, see the Printing Guide.
Displaying proof print job list
2
Press the [PROOF] button.
The proof print job list is displayed.
1
Press the [JOB STATUS] but-
ton on the control panel.
The print job list is displayed.
8JOB STATUS
280 Confirming Print Job Status
Continuing printing after proof printing
1
Select the job you want to print on the proof print job list.
If the corresponding job is not displayed on the page, press the [Prev] or [Next] button to
switch the page.
2
Press the [RELEASE] button.
Printing starts.
yThe printing status can be confirmed on the print job list.
When you want to change the number of sets
When you want to change the number of sets, press the [EDIT] button and key in the
desired number. Then press the [RELEASE] button to start printing.
Confirming Print Job Status 281
Deleting proof print jobs
1
Select the job you want to delete on the proof print job list, and then
press the [DELETE] button.
If the corresponding job is not displayed on the page, press the [Prev] or [Next] button to
switch the page.
2
“Delete OK?” appears. Press the [DELETE] button.
The job is deleted.
8JOB STATUS
282 Confirming Print Job Status
Private print jobs
“Private print” is a function to print a document from a client PC on the network only when a pre-
viously set password is keyed in from the control panel of this equipment. This function is useful
when you want to print confidential documents.
For details of private print jobs, see the Printing Guide.
Displaying private print job list
2
Press the [PRIVATE] button.
1
Press the [JOB STATUS] but-
ton on the control panel.
The print job list is displayed.
Confirming Print Job Status 283
3
Select the appropriate user name.
When you perform the operation as an administrator, do not press the user name but
press the [ADMIN. PASSWORD] button. The letter entry menu ( P.44 “Setting letters”)
appears and you can enter the Admin Password (6 to 10 digits). In this case, jobs can be
deleted but not printed. (If an incorrect Admin Password is entered three times in a row,
this equipment will not be able to be operated for approx. 30 sec. In that case, wait until it
becomes available and then enter the correct Admin Password again.)
8JOB STATUS
284 Confirming Print Job Status
4
Press the [PASSWORD] button.
The private print job list is displayed.
yThe letter entry menu ( P.44 “Setting letters”) is displayed. Key in the password,
which has previously been set from the client PC, and then press the [ENTER] but-
ton.
A list of private print jobs for which the same password has been set appears.
Confirming Print Job Status 285
Printing private print jobs
1
Select the job you want to print on the private print job list.
yIf the corresponding job is not displayed on the page, press the [Prev] or [Next] button
to switch the page.
yTo select all jobs on the private print job list, press the [SELECT ALL] button. To clear
the selection, press the [ALL CLEAR] button.
2
Press the [RELEASE] button.
Printing starts.
yThe printing status can be confirmed on the print job list.
8JOB STATUS
286 Confirming Print Job Status
Deleting private print jobs
1
Select the job you want to delete on the private print job list, and
then press the [DELETE] button.
yIf the corresponding job is not displayed on the page, press the [Prev] or [Next] button
to switch the page.
yTo select all jobs on the private print job list, press the [SELECT ALL] button. To clear
the selection, press the [ALL CLEAR] button.
2
“Delete OK?” appears. Press the [DELETE] button.
The job is deleted.
Confirming Print Job Status 287
When using department codes
If the department code keyed in at printing is not correct, this job will be stored in the invalid
queue (= the list of jobs with an incorrect department code or with no department code), and will
not be printed out. However, the jobs stored in the invalid queue can be printed when the correct
department code is newly keyed in.
A print job, whose number of pages exceeds that specified for a particular department code, will
not be printed out either. In this case, contact the administrator in your office.
Displaying invalid queues
2
Press the [INVALID] button.
The menu for the invalid queue is displayed.
1
Press the [JOB STATUS] but-
ton on the control panel.
The print job list is displayed.
8JOB STATUS
288 Confirming Print Job Status
Keying in correct department code to print
When an incorrect department code has been keyed in at printing, you can key in the correct
department code again to print the subject job.
1
Select the job you want to print on the menu for the invalid queue.
If the corresponding is not displayed on the page, press the [Prev] or [Next] button to
switch the page.
2
Press the [RELEASE] button.
3
Key in the correct department code, and then press the [ENTER]
button.
Printing starts.
yThe printing status can be confirmed on the print job list.
Confirming Print Job Status 289
Deleting invalid print jobs
1
Select the job you want to delete on the menu for the invalid queue,
then press the [DELETE] button.
If the corresponding job is not displayed on the page, press the [Prev] or [Next] button to
switch the page.
2
“Delete OK?” appears. Press the [DELETE] button.
The job is deleted.
8JOB STATUS
290 Confirming Print Job Status
USB print
This function allows you to print files stored in a USB device connected to the connector for USB
storage device of this equipment. In this function only PDF files (with an extension “.pdf”) or
JPEG files (with an extension “.jpg” or “.jpeg”) can be printed.
yIt may take a long time to perform USB printing or cancel it compared to normal printing from
a PC. We recommend normal printing when you print a large number of pages.
yPDF files requiring a password to open or print it cannot be printed in this function.
yThe print range cannot be set. The whole page is printed.
yPDF file versions 1.3 to 1.6 are supported. However, the unique functions, such as the
Transparency in the versions 1.4 to 1.6 are not supported.
Displaying USB print job list
1
Connect the USB device to the
connector for USB storage
device.
After a few seconds, “FOUND USB
DEVICE” appears in the upper right part
of the screen.
Removing USB device
Check that “USB DEVICE in use Do not
remove USB DEVICE” is not appearing.
Do not disconnect the USB device while
this message is displayed. This could
destroy data in the USB device or cause
a malfunction in this equipment.
2
Press the [JOB STATUS] but-
ton on the control panel.
The print job list is displayed.
Confirming Print Job Status 291
3
Press the [USB] button.
4
Key in a department code, and then press the [ENTER] button.
This page will not be displayed when this equipment is not managed under department
codes.
The USB print job list is displayed.
8JOB STATUS
292 Confirming Print Job Status
Printing files
1
Select a file you want to print in the USB print job list.
If the corresponding file is not displayed on the page, press the [Prev] or [Next] button to
switch the page.
If you want to print a file in a folder, select the folder which includes the desired file, and
then press the [OPEN FOLDER] button. Then select the desired file in the displayed
page.
2
Press the [PRINT] button.
Printing starts. Paper exits to the receiving tray.
The printing status can be confirmed in the print job list.
Do not disconnect the USB device while “USB DEVICE in use Do not remove USB
DEVICE” is displayed. This could destroy data in the USB device or cause a malfunction
on this equipment.
Confirming Print Job Status 293
Specifying the number of copies or paper size before printing
You can specify the number of copies, and also can specify its paper size if you print JPEG files.
1
Select a file you want to print in the USB print job list.
If the corresponding file is not displayed on the page, press the [Prev] or [Next] button to
switch the page.
If you want to print a file in a folder, select the folder which includes the desired file, and
then press the [OPEN FOLDER] button. Then select the desired file in the displayed
page.
2
Press the [SETTINGS] button.
3
Key in the number of sets.
8JOB STATUS
294 Confirming Print Job Status
4
Specify the paper size.
The paper size can be specified only when you print JPEG files. (If you carry on printing
JPEG files, the size specified in this step continues to be used.)
5
Press the [ENTER] button.
6
Press the [PRINT] button.
Printing starts. Paper exits to the receiving tray.
The printing status can be confirmed in the print job list.
Do not disconnect the USB device while “USB DEVICE in use Do not remove USB
DEVICE” is displayed. This could destroy data in the USB device or cause a malfunction
on this equipment.
Confirming Scan Job Status 295
Confirming Scan Job Status
You can confirm the scan job status and delete a scan job. For details, refer to the Scanning
Guide.
Press the [JOB STATUS] button on the control panel. Then press the [SCAN] button on the
touch panel to display the scan job list.
The following information is displayed.
4 jobs are displayed in 1 page. Up to 250 pages (1000 jobs) can be displayed. When you want to
confirm the 5th and the following jobs, press the [Next] button, and when you want to return to
the previous page, press the [Prev] button.
Deleting scan job
Select the job you want to delete on the scan job list, and then press the [DELETE] button.
To/File Name: Name of the file created or the E-mail address of the recipient
Agent: Function selected for the scan job
Date, Time: Date and time of the scan job
Pages: Number of pages scanned or sent via E-mail
Status: Status of jobs
8JOB STATUS
296 Log List
Log List
You can confirm the history of each copy, print, scan, and, sending and receiving of Fax, Internet
Fax and E-mail job on the log list.
You can also register unregistered Fax numbers or E-mail addresses into the address book from
the log list of the Fax and Internet Fax, or the log list of scan jobs.
The FAX Unit (optional) is necessary for the Fax function.
When you press the [JOB STATUS] button on the control panel and the [LOG] button on the
touch panel, the log menu is displayed.
Log List 297
Confirming job history in log list
Print log
When you press the [PRINT] button on the log menu, the history of copy jobs and print jobs is
displayed.
The following information is displayed.
4 jobs are displayed in 1 page. Up to 30 pages (120 jobs) can be displayed. When you want to
confirm the 5th and the following jobs, press the [Next] button, and when you want to return to
the previous page, press the [Prev] button.
The following button is displayed.
[RETURN]: Press this button to return to the log menu.
User Name: Name of the senders of the copy/print job
Date, Time: Date and time the job was printed
Paper: Paper size printed
Pages: Number of pages of the copy/print job
Sets: Number of sets printed
8JOB STATUS
298 Log List
Send log
When you press the [SEND] button on the log menu, the sending history of Fax jobs and Inter-
net Fax jobs is displayed. (The Fax function is optional.)
The following information is displayed.
4 jobs are displayed in 1 page. Up to 10 pages (40 jobs) can be displayed. When you want to
confirm the 5th and the following jobs, press the [Next] button, and when you want to return to
the previous page, press the [Prev] button.
The following buttons are displayed.
File No.: Order of job registered
To: Recipient’s Fax number or E-mail address of Internet Fax
Date, Time: Date and time the Fax or Internet Fax was sent
Pages: Number of pages of the Fax or Internet Fax sent
Status: Result is displayed as “OK” or in error codes.
(For the error codes, see P.307 “Error Code”.)
[JOURNAL]: Press this button to print the history of sent jobs (= journal). (For details, see
P.303 “Printing journals (send/receive log list)”.)
[ENTRY]: Press this button to register unregistered Fax numbers or E-mail addresses on
the send log list into the address book. (For details, see P.301 “Registering
into address book from log lists”.)
[RETURN]: Press this button to return to the log menu.
Log List 299
Receive log
When you press the [RECEIVE] button on the log menu, the receiving history of Fax jobs, Inter-
net Fax jobs and E-mail jobs is displayed. (The Fax function is optional.)
The following information is displayed.
4 jobs are displayed in 1 page. Up to 10 pages (40 jobs) can be displayed. When you want to
confirm the 5th and the following jobs, press the [Next] button, and when you want to return to
the previous page, press the [Prev] button.
The following buttons are displayed.
File No.: Order of job registered
From: Sender’s Fax number or E-mail address of Internet Fax
(The recipient's name in the address book is displayed, if registered.)
Date,
Time:
Date and time the Fax, Internet Fax or E-mail was received
Pages: Number of pages of the Fax, Internet Fax or E-mail received
Status: Result is displayed as “OK” or in error codes.
(For the error codes, see P.307 “Error Code”.)
[JOURNAL]: Press this button to print the history of received jobs (= journal). (For details,
see P.303 “Printing journals (send/receive log list)”.)
[ENTRY]: Press this button to register unregistered Fax numbers or E-mail addresses
on the receive log list into the address book. (For details, see P.301 “Reg-
istering into address book from log lists”.)
[RETURN]: Press this button to return to the log menu.
8JOB STATUS
300 Log List
Scan log
When you press the [SCAN] button on the log menu, the histories of the following items are dis-
played.
yJob history of the following functions using the copying functions:
- Storing job in e-filing
- Storing job in a shared folder
yJob history of the following functions using the scanning functions:
- Storing job in e-filing
- Storing job in a shared folder
- Sending E-mails
yJob history of the following function using the printing functions:
- Storing job in e-filing
yJob history of the following function using the e-Filing functions:
- Sending E-mails
yJob history of the following function using the Fax functions:
- Storing job in a shared folder
yJob history of the following functions using the “Received Fax Forward” function:
- Storing job in e-filing
- Storing job in a shared folder
- Sending E-mails
yJob history of the following functions using the “Received Internet Fax Forward” function:
- Storing job in e-filing
- Storing job in a shared folder
- Sending E-mails
The following information is displayed.
4 jobs are displayed in 1 page. Up to 30 pages (120 jobs) can be displayed. When you want to
confirm the 5th and the following jobs, press the [Next] button, and when you want to return to
the previous page, press the [Prev] button.
The following buttons are displayed.
To/File Name: Name of the file created or the E-mail address of the recipient
Agent: Function selected for the scan job
Date, Time: Date and time of the scan job
Pages: Number of pages scanned or sent via E-mail
Status: Result is displayed as “OK” or in error codes.
(For the error codes, see P.307 “Error Code”.)
[ENTRY]: Press this button to register unregistered E-mail addresses on the scan log
list into the address book. (For details, see P.301 “Registering into address
book from log lists”.)
[RETURN]: Press this button to return to the log menu.
Log List 301
Registering into address book from log lists
You can register the information such as the remote Fax numbers and E-mail addresses in the
address book from the send/receive log screen.
The following information can be registered from the Send log:
yRemote FAX number which was dialed by direct entry using the digital keys, or which was
searched for by the LDAP server
yE-mail address which was manually entered, or which was searched for by the LDAP server
The following information can be registered from the Receive log:
yRemote FAX number which was dialed by direct entry using the digital keys, or which was
searched for by the LDAP server for a Polling Reception
yE-mail address of the sender
The following information can be registered from the Scan log:
yE-mail address which was manually entered
1
Press the [SEND] (or [RECEIVE] or [SCAN]) button on the log menu.
The send (or receive or scan) log list is displayed.
2
Select the job which includes the Fax number or E-mail address
you want to register into the address book.
8JOB STATUS
302 Log List
3
Press the [ENTRY] button.
4
Enter the following information. (You need to enter at least either of
[FIRST NAME] or [LAST NAME], and either of [FAX NO.] or [E-
MAIL].)
yFIRST NAME: Enter the first name. The entered first name is displayed in the
address book list on the touch panel.
yLAST NAME: Enter the last name. The entered last name is displayed in the address
book list on the touch panel.
yFAX NO.: Enter the Fax number.
y2ND FAX: Enter the second Fax number.
yE-MAIL: Enter the E-mail address.
yCORP.: Enter the company name.
yDEPT.: Enter the department name.
yKEYWORD: Enter a keyword with which you can search for the desired contact.
When you press any of the above, the letter entry menu ( P.44 “Setting letters”) is dis-
played. Enter the information with the buttons on this menu and the digital keys on the
control panel.
5
Press the [ENTER] button.
yThe information has been registered in the address book.
yFor details of the address book, see the User Functions Guide.
Log List 303
Printing journals (send/receive log list)
You can print the send and receive log lists of the Fax job. The 40 latest send-and-receive logs
(1 page), or the 120 latest send-and-receive logs (3 pages) can be printed out. You can also
select and print only 1 log.
For details, see the Operator’s Manual for Facsimile Function.
1
Press the [SEND] (or [RECEIVE]) button on the log menu.
The send (receive) log list is displayed.
2
Press the [JOURNAL] button.
The send (receive) log list is printed.
8JOB STATUS
304 Print Status Display
Print Status Display
When you press the [STATUS] button on the touch panel while no operation is in progress, the
size of the paper set in the drawer is displayed. When you press the [STATUS] button during
printing, the drawer button being used for the feeding of this printing is highlighted.
Releasing print job errors
If the specified size of paper is not in the drawer when printing is to be performed from a client
PC, a print job error occurs. The [JOB STATUS] button blinks and the following menu is dis-
played.
Follow the procedure below to release the error.
Printing by placing sheets of paper on the bypass tray
2
Place the specified size of paper on the bypass tray, and then press
the [START] button.
Printing is performed. Press the [JOB STATUS] button when printing is completed.
1
Press the blinking
[JOB STATUS] button.
Print Status Display 305
Printing by placing appropriate size of sheets in the drawer
2
Press the drawer button whose size you want to change on the
touch panel.
You can select the desired drawer with the paper source selection ( / ) buttons.
3
Place paper in the corresponding drawer.
4
Press the paper size button corresponding to the one you have
placed.
5
Press the [START] button.
Printing is performed. Press the [JOB STATUS] button when printing is completed.
1
Press the blinking [JOB STA-
TUS] button.
8JOB STATUS
306 Print Status Display
Printing by selecting a paper size already placed in another drawer
When the specified size of paper is not in the drawer, you can release the error by selecting
another size of paper already placed in another drawer, instead of placing the specified size of
paper in the drawer. However, a part of the image may not be printed if the size of the paper
placed in the drawer is smaller than the specified one.
Press the drawer button whose size you want to use on the touch panel. Then press the
[START] button.
Error Code 307
Error Code
If an error occurs while using the printer, optional Fax, optional Internet Fax or scan, the error
code is displayed in the status of each log. Take an appropriate action with reference to the fol-
lowing.
Fax / Internet Fax
Error code Problem What to do
Fax
0012 Original jam Clear the jammed original.
0013 Door open Firmly close the open door.
0020 Power interruption Check the power interruption report.
0030 Reset Transmission is cancelled. (The transmission is terminated by
the jammed printing paper during the Direct Transmission.)
0033 Polling error Check polling options setup (Security code, etc.), and check if
the polling document exists.
0042 Memory full Make sure that there is sufficient memory before making the call
again.
0050 Line busy Retry communications.
0053 Security mismatch in
relay or mailbox trans-
mission
Confirm the remote party’s security code, system password, and
your setup.
00B0 - 00B5
00C0 - 00C4
00D0 - 00D2
00F0, 00F1
Signal error or line
condition error
Retry communications. Frequent failures may indicate a phone
line problem. If possible, move the unit to another line and try
your communications again.
00E8 HDD error Retry communications.
Internet Fax
1C10 System access abnor-
mality
Turn the power OFF and then back ON.
Perform the job in error again. If the error still occurs, contact
your service representative.
1C11 Insufficient memory When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after
the completion of the running jobs. If the error still occurs, turn
the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
1C12 Message reception
error
Turn the power OFF and then back ON.
Perform the job in error again.
1C13 Message transmis-
sion error
Turn the power OFF and then back ON.
Perform the job in error again.
1C14 Invalid parameter When a template is used, form the template again. If the error
still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform
the job again.
1C15 Exceeding file capac-
ity
Ask your administrator to change the “Fragment Page Size” set-
ting for the Internet Fax setting, or reduce the number of pages
and perform the job again.
1C20 System management
module access abnor-
mality
Turn the power OFF and then back ON.
Perform the job in error again. If the recovery is still not com-
pleted, contact your service representative.
1C21-1C22 Job control module
access abnormality
Turn the power OFF and then back ON.
Perform the job in error again. If the recovery is still not com-
pleted, contact your service representative.
1C30-1C33 Disk access error When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after
the completion of the running jobs. If the error still occurs, turn
the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
1C40 Image conversion
abnormality
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error
again. If the error still occurs, contact your service representa-
tive.
1C60 HDD full failure during
processing
Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the
job again. Check if the server or local disc has a sufficient space
in disc capacity.
8JOB STATUS
308 Error Code
1C61 Address book reading
failure
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error
again.
Reset the data in the Address book and perform the job again.
If the error still occurs, contact your service representative.
1C62 Memory acquiring fail-
ure
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error
again. If the error still occurs, contact your service representa-
tive.
1C63 Terminal IP address
unset
Ask your administrator to set the IP address of the equipment.
1C64 Terminal mail address
unset
Ask your administrator to set the E-mail address of the equip-
ment.
1C65 SMTP address unset Ask your administrator to set the SMTP server address.
1C66 Server time time out
error
Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.
1C69 SMTP server connec-
tion error
Ask your administrator to set the login name or password of
SMTP server and perform the job again. Check if the SMTP
server is operating properly.
1C6A HOST NAME error Ask your administrator to check if there is an illegal character in
the device name. Delete the illegal character and reset the
appropriate device name.
1C6B Terminal mail address
error
Ask your administrator to check if there is an illegal character in
the E-mail address of the equipment. Delete the illegal charac-
ter and reset the appropriate E-mail address, then perform the
job again.
1C6C Destination mail
address error
Check if there is an illegal character in the Destination E-mail
address. Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate
Destination E-mail address, then perform the job again.
1C6D System error Turn the power OFF and then back ON.
Perform the job in error again. If the error still occurs, contact
your service representative.
1C70 SMTP client OFF Ask your administrator to enable the SMTP Client and perform
the job again.
1C71 SMTP authentication
error
Check if the SMTP authentication method, login name and
password are correct. If the SSL setting is enabled, check if the
setting and the port number of SSL correspond to those of the
server.
1C72 POP Before SMTP
error
Check if the settings of POP Before SMTP and POP3 are cor-
rect.
1C80 Internet Fax transmis-
sion failure when pro-
cessing E-mail job
received
Confirm the “Received Internet Fax Forward” settings.
1C81 Onramp Gateway
transmission failure
Confirm the mailbox settings.
1C82 Internet Fax transmis-
sion failure when pro-
cessing Fax job
received
Confirm the “Received Fax Forward” setting.
1CC0 Job cancelling Job was cancelled.
1CC1 Power failure Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted
securely. Check if the power voltage is unstable.
3A10-3A12 MIME format error Ask the sender to resend the E-mail in the MIME1.0 format.
3A20-3A22 E-mail process error Ask the sender to resend the E-mail.
3A30 Partial E-mail timeout
error
Ask the sender to resend the E-mail, or change the Partial Wait
time setting.
3A40 Invalid partial E-mail
received
Ask the sender to resend the partial E-mail in the RFC2046 for-
mat.
Error code Problem What to do
Error Code 309
3A50-3A52 HDD full error Ask the sender to resend the E-mail by separating it to several
E-mails. If this error occurs because the paper empty occurs
and too much waiting jobs are stored in the hard disc, add the
paper to activate other jobs.
3A60-3A62 HDD full alert Ask the sender to resend the E-mail by separating it to several
E-mails. If this error occurs because the paper empty occurs
and too much waiting jobs are stored in the hard disc, add the
paper to activate other jobs.
3A70 Interrupt partial E-mail
reception
Ask your administrator to enable the Enable Partial E-mail set-
ting and ask the sender to resend the E-mail.
3A80-3A82 Partial E-mail disabled Ask your administrator to enable the Enable Partial E-mail set-
ting and ask the sender to resend the E-mail.
3B10-3B12 E-mail format error Ask your administrator to enable the Enable Partial E-mail set-
ting and ask the sender to resend the E-mail.
3B20-3B22 Context-type error Ask the sender to resend the E-mail with attached files that are
the TIFF format.
3B30-3B32 Invalid character set Ask the sender to resend the E-mail in the ISO-8559-1/2 format.
3B40-3B42 E-mail decode error Ask the sender to resend the E-mail.
3C10-3C13 TIFF analysis error Ask the sender to resend the E-mail with attached files that are
the TIFF format.
3C20-3C22 TIFF compression
error
Ask the sender to resend the E-mail with attached TIFF files in
the MH, MR, MMR, or JPEG compression.
3C30-3C32 TIFF resolution error Ask the sender to resend the E-mail with attached TIFF files
whose resolution is either 200 x 100, 200 x 200, 200 x 400, 300
x 300, or 400 x 400 dpi.
3C40-3C42 TIFF paper size error Ask the sender to resend the E-mail with attached TIFF files that
can be printed on the paper available for this equipment.
3C50-3C52 Offramp transmission
error
Ask the sender to specify the correct fax numbers and resend
the E-mail.
3C60-3C62 Offramp security error Confirm the fax numbers that are specified in the received
offramp gateway job and ask the sender to resend the E-mail
with correct fax numbers.
3C70 Power failure Confirm the job is recovered or not. If not, ask the sender to
resend the E-mail.
3D10 Destination address
error
Ask your administrator whether the DNS and mail server set-
tings are correctly set. If they are correctly set, ask the sender to
confirm the destination address is correct.
3D20 Exceeding maximum
offramp destinations
Ask the sender to specify up to 40 destinations for one offramp
gateway job. The equipment cannot perform the offramp gate-
way transmission for more than 40 destinations.
3D30 Fax unit is not
installed
Make sure the Fax unit is installed, or connected correctly.
3E10 POP3 server commu-
nication error
Ask your administrator that the POP3 server address is cor-
rectly set, or the POP3 server works properly. Check if the set-
ting and the port number of SSL correspond to those of the
server.
3E20 POP3 server commu-
nication timeout
Ask your administrator that the POP3 server works properly and
the LAN cable is connected to the server.
3E30 POP3 login error Ask your administrator that the POP3 user name and password
is set correctly.
3E40 POP3 login type error Ask your administrator if the login types (Auto, POP3, APOP) to
the POP3 server are correct.
3F00, 3F10,
3F20, 3F30,
3F40
File I/O error Ask the sender to resend the E-mail. If the error still occurs, con-
tact your service representative.
Error code Problem What to do
8JOB STATUS
310 Error Code
Scan Job
Error code Problem What to do
Remote Scan
2A20 Failed to acquire
resource
Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON.
Perform the job in error again.
2A40 System fatal error Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error
again.
2A50 Job cancelling Job was cancelled.
2A51 Power failure Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted
securely. Check if the power voltage is unstable.
Scan to E-mail
2C10, 2C12,
2C13, 2C20-
2C22
Illegal job status A system error has occurred during sending an E-mail. Retry it.
If the error still occurs, contact your service representative.
2C11, 2C62 Not enough memory When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after
the completion of the running jobs. If the error still occurs, turn
the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
2C14 Invalid parameter
specified
Make sure you specify the settings correctly and try again.
2C15 Message size
exceeded limit or max-
imum size
Fragment the message into several smaller-sized ones and
send them again.
2C30-2C33 Disk access error When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after
the completion of the running jobs. If the error still occurs, turn
the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
2C40 Failed to convert
image file format
When this error occurs at the slim PDF setting, retry the scan. If
the error still occurs, retry it with the normal PDF setting.
When this error occurs other than at the slim PDF setting, turn
the power OFF and then back ON. Retry the scan. If the error
still occurs, contact your service representative.
2C61 Failed to read Address
book
Turn the power OFF and then back ON.
Retry the job in error. Reset the data in the Address book and
retry it. If the error still occurs, contact your service representa-
tive.
2C63, 2C64 Invalid domain
address
Ask your administrator to set the IP address.
2C65, 2C66,
2C69
Failed to connect to
SMTP server
Make sure the SMTP server is correctly working, or the SMTP
server address has been set correctly. Then retry the scan.
2C6A Failed to send E-mail
message
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Retry the scan. If the
error still occurs, contact your service representative.
2C6B Invalid address speci-
fied in From: field
Ask your administrator to check if there is an illegal character in
the E-mail address of the equipment. Delete the illegal character
and reset the appropriate E-mail address, then perform the job
again.
2C6C Invalid address speci-
fied in To: field
Check if there is an illegal character in the Destination E-mail
address. Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate
Destination E-mail address, then perform the job again.
2C6D NIC system error Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Retry the job in error. If
the error still occurs, contact your service representative.
2C70 SMTP service is not
available
Ask your administrator to enable the SMTP setting.
2C71 SMTP authentication
error
Check if the SMTP authentication method, login name and
password are correct. Check if the setting and the port number
of SSL correspond to those of the server.
Error Code 311
2C72 POP Before SMTP
error
Check if the settings of POP Before SMTP and POP3 are cor-
rect.
2C80 Failed to process
received E-mail job
Ask your administrator to confirm whether the Received Internet
Fax Forward is set.
2C81 Failed to process
received Fax job
Ask your administrator to confirm whether the Received Fax
Forward is set.
2CC0 Job cancelled Job was cancelled.
2CC1 Power failure occurred Make sure that the power cable is connected properly and it is
inserted securely. Resend the job.
Save as File
2D10, 2D12,
2D13, 2D20-
2D22
Illegal job status Turn the power OFF and then back ON.
Retry sending. If the error still occurs, contact your service rep-
resentative.
2D11 Not enough memory
for saving the scan job
Wait for a while and retry the job. If the error still occurs, turn the
power OFF and then back ON and retry it.
2D14 An internal error
occurred
Turn the power OFF and then back ON, and retry the job. If the
error still occurs, contact your service representative.
2D15 Exceeding maximum
file capacity
Divide the file into several files, or retry in a single-page format.
2D30 Failed to create direc-
tory
Make sure that the access privilege to the storage directory is
writable and also the disk or the USB device in the directory
have enough space. Then retry the job. If more than one job is
performed simultaneously, an error may occur because the disk
temporarily runs out of space. In this case, wait for a while and
retry the job. If an error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then
back ON, and then retry it.
2D31, 2D33 Failed to create file Make sure that the access privilege to the storage directory is
writable and also the disk or the USB device in the directory
have enough space. Then retry the job. If more than one job is
performed simultaneously, an error may occur because the disk
temporarily runs out of space. In this case, wait for a while and
retry the job. If an error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then
back ON, and then retry it.
2D32 Failed to delete file Make sure that the access privilege to the storage directory is
writable and then perform it again. If the error still occurs, turn
the power OFF and then back ON, and then carry it out again.
2D40 Failed to convert
image file format
When this error occurs at the slim PDF setting, retry the scan. If
the error still occurs, retry it with the normal PDF setting.
When this error occurs other than at the slim PDF setting, turn
the power OFF and then back ON. Retry the scan. If the error
still occurs, contact your service representative.
2D60 Failed to copy file Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Retry the scan. If the
error still occurs, contact your service representative.
2D62 Failed to connect to
network destination.
Check destination
path.
Check destination path.
Make sure that the network path is correct, and retry the scan. If
the error still occurs, ask your administrator to confirm whether
the IP address or path of the server is correct. Also make sure
that the server is operating properly.
2D63 Specified network path
is invalid. Check desti-
nation path.
Make sure you specify correct network folder and retry the scan.
2D64 Logon to file server
failed. Check user-
name and password.
Make sure you specify correct user name and password to
logon the file server and retry the scan.
Error code Problem What to do
8JOB STATUS
312 Error Code
2D65 There are too many
documents in the
folder. Failed in creat-
ing new document.
Delete the data in the local storage folder in the equipment and
retry the scan.
2D66 Failed to process your
job. Insufficient stor-
age space.
Delete the data in the local storage folder in the equipment and
retry the scan.
2D67 FTP service is not
available.
Ask your administrator whether the FTP service is configured
correctly.
2D68 File sharing service is
not available.
Ask your administrator whether the SMB protocol is enabled.
2DA8 The HDD is running
out of capacity for the
shared folder.
Delete the unnecessary data in HDD.
2DC0 Job cancelled. Job was cancelled.
2DC1 Power failure
occurred.
Make sure that the power cable is connected properly and it is
inserted securely. Resend the job.
Store to e-Filing
2B10 There was no applica-
ble job.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Retry the scan. If the
error still occurs, contact your service representative.
2B11 Job status failed. Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Retry the scan. If the
error still occurs, contact your service representative.
2B20 Failed to access file Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Retry the scan. If the
error still occurs, contact your service representative.
2B21 Message size
exceeded limit or
maximum size
Fragment the message into several smaller-sized ones and
send them again.
2B30 Insufficient disc space Delete unnecessary documents in e-Filing and try again.
2B31 Failed to access e-Fil-
ing
Make sure that the specified e-Filing or folder exists. (If not, this
error would not occur.). Turn the power OFF and then back ON.
Delete the specified e-Filing or folder and reset them. Retry the
job in error. If the specified e-Filing or folder cannot be deleted,
contact your service representative.
2B32 Failed to print e-Filing
document
Make sure that the specified document exists. (If not, this error
would not occur.).Turn the power OFF and then back ON.
Delete the specified document. If the specified document cannot
be deleted, contact your service representative.
2B50 Failed to process
image
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Retry the scan. If the
error still occurs, contact your service representative.
2B51 Failed to process print
image
Make sure that the Function List can be printed out. Retry the
print. If the error still occurs, contact your service representative.
2B90 Insufficient memory Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Retry the scan. If the
error still occurs, contact your service representative.
2BA0 Invalid box password
specified
Make sure that the password is correct and retry the scan, or
reset the password and retry the scan. When this error occurs
for the print of the data in the e-Filing, perform the print with the
administrator’s password. If the recovery is still not completed or
in case of invalid password for the operation other than printing
(opening the file, etc.), contact your service representative.
2BB0 Job cancelled. Job was cancelled by the user.
2BB1 Power failure
occurred.
Make sure that the power cable is connected properly and it is
inserted securely.
2BC0 System fatal error Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Retry the print. If the
error still occurs, contact your service representative.
Error code Problem What to do
Error Code 313
2BC1 Failed to acquire
resource
Ask your administrator if the e-Filing function is enabled. Retry
the job in error. If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and
then back ON. And then retry the job in error.
2B60 The folder was
renamed. A folder of
the same name
already existed.
Check the folder to be made.
2B70 The document was
renamed. A document
of the same name
already existed.
Check the data to be stored.
2B71 The storage period of
e-Filing documents will
expire.
Check the storage period.
2B80 The HDD for storing
e-Filing data is running
out of space.
Delete the unnecessary data in HDD.
2BA1 Incorrect paper size or
colour mode
This size or colour mode is not supported by e-Filing. Check the
paper size or colour mode.
2BD0 Power failure occurred
during restoring.
Check the power cable.
2BE0 Failed to obtain the
machine parameters.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON to print again.
2BF0 Reached the maxi-
mum number of
pages.
Reduce the pages to be inserted, and print them.
2BF1 Reached the maxi-
mum number of docu-
ments.
Delete unnecessary documents in the box or folder.
2BF2 Reached the maxi-
mum number of fold-
ers.
Delete unnecessary folders in the box.
Printer
4031 HDD full for printing Too many jobs of Private print and department code print are
stored in HDD.
4032 Private-print-only error Jobs other than Private print cannot be printed. Perform Private
printing.
4033 Printing data storing
limitation error
Printing with its data being stored to the HDD temporarily (Proof
print, Private print, Scheduled print, etc.) cannot be performed.
Perform normal printing.
4034 e-Filing storing limita-
tion error
Printing with its data being stored to the HDD (print and e-Filing,
print to e-Filing, etc.) cannot be performed. Perform normal
printing.
4035 Local file storing limita-
tion error
Network Fax or Internet Fax cannot be sent when “Local” is
selected for the destination of the file to save. Select “Remote”
(SMB/FTP) for the destination.
4036 User authentication
error
The user performing the printing has not been authenticated or
user-registered. Perform user authentication or user registra-
tion.
4040 No authority to exe-
cute a job
Ask your administrator about it.
4050 The connection with
the LDAP server or its
authority setting has
something wrong.
Ask your LDAP server administrator about it.
Error code Problem What to do
8JOB STATUS
314 Error Code
RFC related
4300 Job execution error
due to functional
restrictions
USB direct printing cannot be performed due to a functional
restriction. Contact your service technician.
4301 File conversion error The format of this file is not supported in the USB direct printing,
or the file is invalid. Check the file.
A221 Print job cancel Print job is cancelled. Retry the print.
A222 Print Job power inter-
ruption
Power failure occurred. Retry the print.
A290 Limit over error
(Black and White)
Number of prints has exceeded the one specified with the
department code and user code at the same time. Clear the limit
counter.
A291 Limit over error
(Black and White)
Number of prints has exceeded the one specified with the user
code. Clear the limit counter.
A292 Limit over error
(Black and White)
Number of prints has exceeded the one specified with the
department code. Clear the limit counter.
A2A0 Limit over error
(Colour)
Number of prints has exceeded the one specified with the
department code and user code at the same time. Clear the limit
counter.
A2A1 Limit over error
(Colour)
Number of prints has exceeded the one specified with the user
code. Clear the limit counter.
A2A2 Limit over error
(Colour)
Number of prints has exceeded the one specified with the
department code. Clear the limit counter.
Error code Problem What to do
2500 Syntax error, com-
mand unrecognized:
HOST NAME error
(RFC: 500), Destina-
tion mail address error
(RFC: 500), Terminal
mail address error
(RFC: 500)
Check if the Terminal mail address and Destination mail address
are correct.
Check if the mail server is operating properly.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job in
error again.
2501 Syntax error in param-
eters or arguments:
HOST NAME error
(RFC: 501), Destina-
tion mail address error
(RFC: 501), Terminal
mail address error
(RFC: 501)
Check if the Terminal mail address and Destination mail address
are correct.
Check if the mail server is operating properly.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job in
error again.
2503 Destination mail
address error
(RFC: 503)
Check if the mail server is operating properly.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job in
error again.
If the error still occurs, contact your service representative.
2504 HOST NAME error
(RFC: 504)
Check if the mail server is operating properly.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job in
error again.
If the error still occurs, contact your service representative.
2550 Destination mail
address error
(RFC: 550)
Check if the Destination mail address is correct. Check the sta-
tus of mailbox access restriction, etc. on the mail server.
Error code Problem What to do
Error Code 315
2551 Destination mail
address error
(RFC: 551)
Check the Destination mail address. Check if the mail server is
operating properly.
2552 Terminal/Destination
mail address error
(RFC: 552)
Check if the Destination mail address is correct. Check the
restriction of the capacity in the mailbox of the mail server.
2553 Terminal/Destination
mail address error
(RFC: 553)
Check if there is an illegal character in the mailbox in the mail
server.
Error code Problem What to do
8JOB STATUS
316 Error Code
9.BLINKING GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
This chapter explains the graphic symbols blinking on the touch panel to notify you of the status of the equip-
ment and the appropriate actions to be taken.
Blinking Graphic Symbols ...................................................................................318
Drawer Display on the Touch Panel ....................................................................319
Replace Toner Cartridge Symbol ........................................................................320
Recommendation for original toner .................................................................................................321
Replacing the toner cartridge ..........................................................................................................322
Cleaning the slit glasses .................................................................................................................323
Cleaning the chargers.....................................................................................................................326
Replace Toner Bag Symbol..................................................................................327
Jam Symbols.........................................................................................................329
Misfeed in the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (optional)..................................................329
Misfeed in drawer feeding area.......................................................................................................332
Misfeed in the Large Capacity Feeder (optional) ............................................................................333
Misfeed in the Paper Feed Pedestal (optional) ...............................................................................334
Misfeed on the bypass tray .............................................................................................................334
Misfeed in the automatic duplexing unit ..........................................................................................335
Misfeed in the jam releasing cover..................................................................................................336
Misfeed in the fuser unit..................................................................................................................337
Misfeed in the Bridge Unit (optional)...............................................................................................340
Misfeed in the Finisher and the Hole Punch Unit (optional: MJ-1101, MJ-6101) ............................341
Misfeed in the Saddle Stitch Finisher and the Hole Punch Unit (optional: MJ-1030, MJ-6004) ......346
Misfeed in the Saddle Stitch Unit (optional) ....................................................................................348
Call Service Symbol..............................................................................................351
9 BLINKING GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
318 Blinking Graphic Symbols
Blinking Graphic Symbols
1. Error code
2. Guidance display area
3. Illustration of the equipment
4. Replace toner cartridge symbol ( P.320 “Replace Toner Cartridge Symbol”)
5. Replace toner bag symbol ( P.327 “Replace Toner Bag Symbol”)
6. Jam symbol ( P.329 “Jam Symbols”)
7. Call service symbol ( P.351 “Call Service Symbol”)
When one of the graphic symbols 4 to 7 blinks, take the appropriate action referring to the indi-
cated pages.
7
16
3
2
45
Drawer Display on the Touch Panel 319
Drawer Display on the Touch Panel
When the drawer runs out of paper, the drawer display on the touch panel starts blinking. Add
paper to the drawer.
9 BLINKING GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
320 Replace Toner Cartridge Symbol
Replace Toner Cartridge Symbol
When the toner in the cartridge runs out, the Replace toner cartridge symbol blinks and the fol-
lowing message appears.
Up to approx. 50 copies can be made after the Replace Toner Cartridge Symbol starts blinking.
(The maximum number of copies that can be made varies depending on the copying/printing
conditions.)
When the black toner runs out:
“Install new Black toner cartridge” appears.
When the yellow, magenta or cyan toner runs out:
“Install new Yellow (Magenta or Cyan) toner cartridge” appears.
When more than one colour of toner runs out:
The colour is abbreviated to a letter of the alphabet in the message. (Black -> K, Yellow -> Y,
Magenta -> M, Cyan -> C) The following message appears when yellow and magenta toners
have run out at the same time:
“Install new Y M toner cartridge”
Never attempt to incinerate toner cartridges. Dispose of used toner cartridges and toner bags in
accordance with local regulations.
To maintain fine image quality, perform cleaning for the slit glass and chargers following the pro-
cedure bellow.
Replacing the toner cartridge
Cleaning the slit glasses
Cleaning the chargers
Replace Toner Cartridge Symbol 321
Recommendation for original toner
At Toshiba we strive to provide you with the highest quality images. Please use genuine Toshiba
toner to ensure that you continue to receive quality output that is environmentally safe.
9 BLINKING GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
322 Replace Toner Cartridge Symbol
Replacing the toner cartridge
When you want to replace a cartridge before the Replace toner cartridge symbol blinks, see the
User Functions Guide.
1
Open the front cover.
2
Put your fingers in the groove
and slowly pull out the colour
toner cartridge to be replaced.
3
When the cartridge is pulled
out more than halfway, pull it
straight out while supporting
it.
Never attempt to incinerate toner cartridges. Dispose of used toner cartridges and toner bags
in accordance with local regulations.
Replace Toner Cartridge Symbol 323
Cleaning the slit glasses
4
Shake the new toner cartridge
well to loosen the toner inside.
5
Pull out the seal in the direc-
tion of the arrow.
6
Insert the new toner cartridge
straight until it stops.
Then clean the slit glasses.
1
The slit glass cleaner is placed
inside the front cover. Press
and release the latch of the
holder to take out the slit glass
cleaner.
9 BLINKING GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
324 Replace Toner Cartridge Symbol
2
Remove the cap.
yDo not touch the slit glass cleaner
pad, the toner on the pad may stick
to your hands and the cleaner pad
may become contaminated.
yUse the slit glass cleaner with its pad
side facing down.
3
Insert the cleaner through the
service hole under each devel-
oper to clean the slit glass.
Replace Toner Cartridge Symbol 325
4
Insert the cleaner all the way
in, and then pull it out. Repeat
this two or three times for each
colour.
Insert the cleaner all the way in until the
arrow mark on the cleaner is hidden.
5
Install the cap.
Do not touch the slit glass cleaner pad,
the toner on the pad may stick to your
hands and the cleaner pad may become
contaminated.
6
Attach the cleaner to the front
cover. Check if the cleaner is
securely held by the holder.
9 BLINKING GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
326 Replace Toner Cartridge Symbol
Cleaning the chargers
1
Pull out the knob of the
charger cleaner for yellow
straight until the red mark
appears.
2
Insert the charger cleaner
straight until it stops.
yRepeat steps 1 and 2 two or three
times to clean the chargers.
yClean all the chargers in the order of
yellow, magenta, cyan and black.
3
Close the front cover. “Wait
adding toner” appears. The
equipment automatically starts
supplying toner.
234
1
Replace Toner Bag Symbol 327
Replace Toner Bag Symbol
When the toner bag becomes full of used toner, the replace toner bag symbol blinks and “Dis-
pose of used toner” appears.
Replace the toner bag following the procedure below.
1
Open the front cover.
2
Pull the toner bag out care-
fully.
Do not tilt the toner cartridge, or the
toner may be spilled out.
Never attempt to incinerate toner bags.
Dispose of used toner cartridges and
toner bags in accordance with local reg-
ulations.
3
Remove lids from the side of
the toner bag.
9 BLINKING GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
328 Replace Toner Bag Symbol
4
Put the lid on the toner bag.
5
Set a new toner bag.
6
Close the front cover.
Jam Symbols 329
Jam Symbols
When a paper misfeed occurs in the equipment, the jam symbol blinks in the positions where the
paper is misfed. Follow the guidance on the touch panel to remove the misfed paper properly.
yThe misfed paper may not be in the correct position as shown in the illustration depending on
the timing of the misfeeding.
1. Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (optional) ( P.329)
2. Fuser Unit ( P.337)
3. Automatic Duplexing Unit ( P.335)
4. Bypass tray ( P.334)
5. Drawer feeding area ( P.332)
6. Large Capacity Feeder or Paper Feed Pedestal (both optional) ( P.333)
7. Jam releasing cover ( P.336)
8. Bridge Unit (optional) ( P.340)
9. Finisher and Hole Punch Unit (both optional: MJ-1101, MJ-6101) ( P.341)
10. Finisher and Hole Punch Unit (both optional: MJ-1030, MJ-6004) ( P.346)
11. Saddle Stitch Unit of Saddle Stitch Finisher (optional) ( P.348)
Misfeed in the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (optional)
1 42 3
7119 8 56 10
1
Raise the lever, and then open
the upper cover.
9 BLINKING GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
330 Jam Symbols
2
Remove any misfed originals.
3
Turn the dial to remove the
misfed original.
4
Open the transport guide.
5
Raise the guide plate under the
transport guide, and then
remove the original under the
guide plate.
Jam Symbols 331
6
Close the transport guide, and then the upper cover.
7
Open the Reversing Auto-
matic Document Feeder.
8
Open the reverse cover, and
then remove the original.
9
Close the Reversing Automatic
Document Feeder.
10
Raise the lever, and then open
the upper cover.
9 BLINKING GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
332 Jam Symbols
12
Lower the original feeding tray.
Misfeed in drawer feeding area
11
Raise the original feeding tray,
and then remove the original
under the tray.
13
Close the upper cover.
1
Open the cover.
2
Remove any misfed paper.
Jam Symbols 333
Misfeed in the Large Capacity Feeder (optional)
3
Close the cover.
3
Close the cover.
1
Open the cover of the Large
Capacity Feeder.
2
Remove any misfed paper.
9 BLINKING GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
334 Jam Symbols
Misfeed in the Paper Feed Pedestal (optional)
3
Close the cover.
Misfeed on the bypass tray
1
Open the cover of the Paper
Feed Pedestal remove any
misfed paper.
2
Remove any misfed paper.
1
Pull out misfed paper on the
bypass tray.
Jam Symbols 335
Misfeed in the automatic duplexing unit
yBe careful not to let your fingers be caught between the equipment and the automatic
duplexing unit. This could injure you.
yDo not touch the metal portion of a guide plate as it could burn you.
3
Lower the paper guide and return the automatic duplexing unit to
the original position.
Be sure to close both sides of the automatic duplexing unit firmly.
1
Open the automatic duplexing
unit.
2
Lift the paper guide as indi-
cated by the arrow and remove
any misfed paper.
9 BLINKING GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
336 Jam Symbols
Misfeed in the jam releasing cover
4
Return the jam releasing cover, the automatic duplexing unit to the
original positions.
Be sure to close both sides of the jam releasing cover and the automatic duplexing unit
firmly.
1
Open the automatic duplexing
unit.
2
Put your fingers into A, push it
up to release the lock and
open the jam releasing cover.
3
Rotate the green knob as indi-
cated by the arrow toward the
inside and remove any misfed
paper.
A
Jam Symbols 337
Misfeed in the fuser unit
Do not touch the fuser unit or the metal area around it. Since they are very hot, you could be
burned or the shock could cause an injury to your hand.
1
Open the Automatic duplexing
unit.
2
Open the jam releasing cover.
3
Holding the green knob, open
the transport guide. If no mis-
fed paper can be found on the
exit side, perform step 8 and
subsequent steps in Tip.
A
9 BLINKING GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
338 Jam Symbols
4
Open the cover of the Bridge
Unit (optional). When the Fin-
isher (optional) is not installed,
skip this step.
5
Rotate the green dial down-
ward as indicated by the arrow
to move the paper to the exit
side.
6
Remove any misfed paper
from the receiving tray or the
Bridge Unit (optional).
7
Close the cover of the Bridge
Unit (optional). Skip this step if
the Finisher (optional) is not
installed.
If no misfed paper can be found on the
exit side, perform step 8.
Jam Symbols 339
10
Close the jam releasing cover and the Automatic duplexing unit. Be
sure to close both sides of the Automatic duplexing unit.
8
Rotate the green dial upward
as indicated by the arrow to
move the paper down.
9
Holding the green knob, close
the transport guide.
9 BLINKING GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
340 Jam Symbols
Misfeed in the Bridge Unit (optional)
3
Close the Bridge unit cover.
1
Holding the cover handle of
the Bridge Unit, open the
cover.
2
Remove any misfed paper that
is inside the Bridge Unit.
When the misfed paper cannot be removed because the right side of the paper is caught by
the fuser unit, follow steps on P.337 “Misfeed in the fuser unit”.
Jam Symbols 341
Misfeed in the Finisher and the Hole Punch Unit (optional: MJ-1101,
MJ-6101)
A paper misfeed at the upper tray
1
Raise the lever, and then open
the upper tray.
2
Remove any misfed paper.
3
Holding the cover handle of
the Bridge Unit, open the
cover.
When the Hole Punch Unit (optional: MJ-
6101) is installed, proceed to step 5.
9 BLINKING GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
342 Jam Symbols
When installing the Hole Punch Unit (optional: MJ-6101)
4
Remove any misfed paper.
Proceed to step 8.
5
Open the cover of the Hole
Punch Unit.
6
Turn the knob anticlockwise to
remove any misfed paper.
7
Close the cover of the Hole
Punch Unit.
Jam Symbols 343
8
Close the cover of the Bridge Unit.
A paper misfeed at the lower tray
9
Close the upper tray.
Place both hands at the shaded area of
the upper tray, and then push and close
the upper tray until it locks.
The upper tray can be closed by
pressing the right side of the latch.
1
Raise the lever, and then open
the upper tray.
2
Remove any misfed paper.
9 BLINKING GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
344 Jam Symbols
3
Lower the shutter of the paper
exit.
4
Remove any misfed paper.
5
Holding the cover handle of
the Bridge Unit, open the
cover.
When the Hole Punch Unit (optional: MJ-
6101) is installed, proceed to step 7.
6
Remove any misfed paper.
Proceed to step 10.
Jam Symbols 345
When installing the Hole Punch Unit (optional: MJ-6101)
10
Close the cover of the Bridge Unit.
7
Open the cover of the Hole
Punch Unit.
8
Turn the knob anticlockwise to
remove any misfed paper.
9
Close the cover of the Hole
Punch Unit.
11
Close the upper tray.
Place both hands at the shaded area of
the upper tray, and then push and close
the upper tray until it locks.
9 BLINKING GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
346 Jam Symbols
Misfeed in the Saddle Stitch Finisher and the Hole Punch Unit
(optional: MJ-1030, MJ-6004)
The upper tray can be closed by
pressing the right side of the latch.
1
Hold up the guide and remove
any misfed paper in the paper
exit area.
When the Hole Punch Unit (optional: MJ-
6004) is installed, proceed to step 2. If
not installed, proceed to step 6.
2
Open the front cover of the
Hole Punch Unit.
3
Turn the green knob to locate
the triangle mark within the
area indicated on the label.
Under this condition, the punchers are
up.
Jam Symbols 347
8
Close the upper cover.
4
Raise the Hole Punch Unit, and
remove any misfed paper.
5
Return the Hole Punch Unit to
the original position and close
the front cover.
6
Open the upper cover of the
Finisher until it locks.
7
Remove any misfed paper.
9 BLINKING GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
348 Jam Symbols
Misfeed in the Saddle Stitch Unit (optional)
1
Open the front cover of the
Saddle Stitch Finisher.
2
Slide the green handle toward
the right and remove the mis-
fed paper.
3
Move the green handle to the
right-hand side.
4
Remove any misfed paper and
return the handle to its original
position.
Jam Symbols 349
5
Turn the right-hand knob anti-
clockwise.
6
Turn the left-hand knob clock-
wise while you are pushing it.
7
Remove any misfed paper on
the exit side of the Saddle
Stitch Unit.
8
Raise the lever and open the
exit cover of the Saddle Stitch
Unit.
9 BLINKING GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
350 Jam Symbols
10
Close the exit cover and the front cover.
9
Remove any misfed paper.
Call Service Symbol 351
Call Service Symbol
1. Call service symbol
2. Error code
Never attempt to repair, disassemble or modify the equipment by yourself. You could cause a
fire or get an electric shock.
Always contact your service representative for maintenance or repair of the internal parts of the
equipment.
When the call service symbol blinks and “Misfeed in copier Press HELP” appears, output is no
longer possible. Contact your service representative with the information of the displayed error
code.
1
2
9 BLINKING GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
352 Call Service Symbol
10.WHEN THIS MESSAGE APPEARS
This chapter explains the various messages displayed on the touch panel and the appropriate actions to be
taken.
“Toner near Empty” ..............................................................................................355
“Time for Slit glass and Main charger cleaning” ...............................................358
Cleaning the slit glass .....................................................................................................................358
Cleaning the chargers.....................................................................................................................361
“Check staple cartridge”......................................................................................362
Finisher (optional: MJ-1101)............................................................................................................362
Finisher (optional: MJ-1030) ...........................................................................................................364
“Check staple cartridge in the Saddle Stitch Unit”............................................366
“Examine stapler”.................................................................................................368
Finisher (optional: MJ-1101)............................................................................................................368
Finisher (optional: MJ-1030) ...........................................................................................................370
“READY (CHECK STAPLER)” ..............................................................................372
“Examine stapler in the Saddle Stitch Unit”.......................................................373
“READY (CHECK SADDLE STITCH STAPLER)” ................................................376
“READY (HOLE PUNCH DUST BIN IS FULL)” ....................................................377
Hole Punch Unit (optional: MJ-6101, MJ-6004) ..............................................................................377
“POWER FAILURE” ..............................................................................................378
“Time for periodic maintenance” ........................................................................379
“Check paper size setting on control panel for drawer N” ...............................380
During copying (using a drawer) .....................................................................................................380
During copying (using the bypass tray)...........................................................................................383
During printing from the FAX or Printer (using a drawer) ................................................................384
During printing from the Printer (using the bypass tray)..................................................................386
“Cannot print this paper size Select the other drawer” ....................................388
“Cannot print this paper type Set the other paper type” ..................................389
“Reboot the machine”..........................................................................................390
“Toner near Empty” 355
“Toner near Empty”
This message appears when toner in any of the toner cartridges has become little. Up to approx.
4000 copies can be made after it has appeared. The icon of the colour of the corresponding
toner cartridge is lit in the equipment status indication area. Prepare a new cartridge accordingly.
K: Black
Y: Yellow
M: Magenta
C: Cyan
There is still a little toner remaining in the toner cartridge while this message is being shown.
Replace the toner cartridge with a new one when it has become completely empty.
yWhen any of the toner cartridges has become completely empty, “Install new Black toner
cartridge” or “Install new Yellow (Magenta or Cyan) toner cartridge” appears, and the icon of
the colour of the corresponding toner cartridge blinks.
P.320 “Replace Toner Cartridge Symbol”
If you have replaced the toner cartridge while “Toner near Empty” is being shown, reset the
counter value after the replacement by following the procedure below.
If you do not reset the counter value in this step, the next “Toner near Empty” message may not
appear at a proper timing.
1
Press the [USER FUNCTIONS]
button.
10 WHEN THIS MESSAGE APPEARS
356 “Toner near Empty”
2
Press the [USER] button.
3
Press the [GENERAL] button.
4
Press the [REPLACE TONER CARTRIDGE] button.
“Toner near Empty” 357
5
Press the button for the colour of the toner cartridge which you
have replaced.
6
Press the [FINISH] button.
7
Press the [YES] button.
10 WHEN THIS MESSAGE APPEARS
358 “Time for Slit glass and Main charger cleaning”
“Time for Slit glass and Main charger cleaning”
This message appears when the slit glass and the main charger require cleaning. When it
appears, follow the steps below to clean the slit glasses and the chargers.
Also clean the slit glasses and the chargers when the toner cartridge is replaced with a new one.
Cleaning the slit glass
Toner adhering on the surface of the slit glass will reduce the image quality. Follow the proce-
dure bellow to clean the slit glass.
1
Open the front cover.
2
The slit glass cleaner is placed
inside the front cover. Press
and release the latch of the
holder to take out the slit glass
cleaner.
“Time for Slit glass and Main charger cleaning” 359
3
Remove the cap.
yDo not touch the slit glass cleaner
pad, the toner on the pad may stick
to your hands and the cleaner pad
may become contaminated.
yUse the slit glass cleaner with its pad
side facing down.
4
Insert the cleaner through the
service hole under each devel-
oper to clean the slit glass.
10 WHEN THIS MESSAGE APPEARS
360 “Time for Slit glass and Main charger cleaning”
5
Insert the cleaner all the way
in, and then pull it out. Repeat
this two or three times for each
colour.
Insert the cleaner all the way in until the
arrow mark on the cleaner is hidden.
6
Install the cap.
Do not touch the slit glass cleaner pad,
the toner on the pad may stick to your
hands and the cleaner pad may become
contaminated.
7
Attach the cleaner to the front
cover. Check if the cleaner is
securely held by the holder.
“Time for Slit glass and Main charger cleaning” 361
Cleaning the chargers
1
Pull out the knob of the
charger cleaner for yellow
straight until the red mark
appears.
2
Insert the charger cleaner
straight until it stops.
yRepeat steps 1 and 2 two or three
times to clean the chargers.
yClean all the chargers in the order of
yellow, magenta, cyan and black.
3
Close the front cover.
234
1
10 WHEN THIS MESSAGE APPEARS
362 “Check staple cartridge”
“Check staple cartridge”
This message will be shown only if the finisher (optional) is installed. When the staples in the
stapler of the finisher run out, this message appears.
Add staples to the cartridge according to the following procedure.
Finisher (optional: MJ-1101)
1
Open the front cover of the fin-
isher.
2
Take off the staple cartridge.
“Check staple cartridge” 363
6
Close the front cover of finisher.
If “Check staple cartridge” remains, repeat the above procedure from steps 1 to 6.
3
Take the empty staple case out
of the staple cartridge.
4
Install a new staple case into
the staple cartridge.
Insert the new case into the cartridge
until you hear a click sound.
5
Install the staple cartridge onto
the stapler.
yWhen installing the staple cartridge,
hold the mint-green colour label por-
tion of the bracket securely so that it
will not move.
yInsert the cartridge until it is caught
by the latch and fixed with a click
sound.
10 WHEN THIS MESSAGE APPEARS
364 “Check staple cartridge”
Finisher (optional: MJ-1030)
1
Open the front cover of the fin-
isher.
2
Take off the staple cartridge.
3
Take the empty staple case out
of the staple cartridge.
4
Remove the seal bundling the
staples.
Be careful that the staples are not
misaligned.
“Check staple cartridge” 365
7
Close the front cover of finisher.
If “Check staple cartridge” remains, repeat the above procedure from steps 1 to 7.
5
Install a new staple case into
the staple cartridge.
Insert the new case into the cartridge
until you hear a click sound.
6
Install the staple cartridge onto
the stapler.
Insert the cartridge until it is caught by
the latch and fixed with a click sound.
10 WHEN THIS MESSAGE APPEARS
366 “Check staple cartridge in the Saddle Stitch Unit”
“Check staple cartridge in the Saddle Stitch Unit”
This message will be shown only if the Saddle Stitch Finisher (optional) is installed. When the
staples in the stapler of the Saddle Stitch Finisher run out, this message appears.
Replace the staple cartridge according to the following procedure.
1
Open the front cover of the fin-
isher.
2
Slide the Saddle Stitch Unit
carefully toward the front.
3
Pull the handle of the stapler of
the Saddle Stitch Unit toward
you to unlock it. Then turn the
stapler clockwise for about 60
degrees.
The stapler will be locked and will not be
turned any further when it becomes
almost horizontal.
2
1
“Check staple cartridge in the Saddle Stitch Unit” 367
8
Close the front cover of the finisher.
4
Take out the empty staple car-
tridge.
Replace both cartridges at a time.
5
Install the new staple car-
tridge.
When installing a staple cartridge, push
it downward until it is fixed with a click
sound.
6
Pull the handle of the stapler of
the Saddle Stitch Unit toward
you to unlock it. Then lower
the stapler to its original posi-
tion.
7
Insert the Saddle Stitch Unit
into the finisher carefully.
21
10 WHEN THIS MESSAGE APPEARS
368 “Examine stapler”
“Examine stapler”
This message appears when the staples in the finisher (optional) are jammed. To remove them,
follow the procedure below.
Finisher (optional: MJ-1101)
1
Open the front cover of the fin-
isher.
2
Take off the staple cartridge.
3
Lower the guide while holding
the knob.
A: Stapling area A
“Examine stapler” 369
7
Close the front cover of finisher.
Do not touch the stapling area. The stapler could injure you.
4
Remove any jammed staples.
5
Hold the knob and raise the
guide, and then return the
guide to its original position.
6
Install the staple cartridge into
the stapler.
yWhen installing the staple cartridge,
hold the mint-green colour label por-
tion of the bracket securely so that it
will not move.
yInsert the cartridge until it is caught
by the latch and fixed with a click
sound.
10 WHEN THIS MESSAGE APPEARS
370 “Examine stapler”
Finisher (optional: MJ-1030)
1
Open the front cover of the fin-
isher.
2
Take off the staple cartridge.
3
Lower the guide while holding
the knob.
A: Stapling area
Do not touch the stapling area. The stapler could injure you.
4
Remove any jammed staples.
A
“Examine stapler” 371
7
Close the front cover of the finisher.
5
Hold the knob and raise the
guide, and then return the
guide to its original position.
6
Install the staple cartridge into
the stapler.
Insert the cartridge until it is caught by
the latch and fixed with a click sound.
10 WHEN THIS MESSAGE APPEARS
372 “READY (CHECK STAPLER)”
“READY (CHECK STAPLER)”
This message will be shown only when the finisher (optional) is installed. It appears when the
staples in the stapler of the finisher run out or when the staples in the finisher are jammed. Clear
the error according to the procedure in P.358 ““Time for Slit glass and Main charger clean-
ing””.
“Examine stapler in the Saddle Stitch Unit” 373
“Examine stapler in the Saddle Stitch Unit”
This message appears when the staples in the Saddle Stitch Unit of the Saddle Stitch Finisher
(optional) are jammed. To remove them, follow the procedure below.
1
Open the front cover of the fin-
isher.
2
Slide the Saddle Stitch Unit
carefully toward the front.
3
Pull the handle of the stapler of
the Saddle Stitch Unit toward
you to unlock it. Then turn the
stapler clockwise for about 60
degrees.
The stapler will be locked and will not be
turned any further when it becomes
almost horizontal.
2
1
10 WHEN THIS MESSAGE APPEARS
374 “Examine stapler in the Saddle Stitch Unit”
4
Take off the staple cartridge.
5
While pushing the lever (1)
downward, pull up the shutter
with the knob (2).
6
Remove any jammed staples.
A: Stapling area
Do not touch the stapling area. The stapler could injure you.
7
Push the knob (2) to return it to
its original position.
Confirm if the lever (1) is latched onto
the shutter.
2
1
A
12
“Examine stapler in the Saddle Stitch Unit” 375
11
Check the following 2 items before test stapling.
yCheck if the finisher is securely installed on the equipment.
yCheck if any of A3, B4 or A4-R paper is set in the drawer.
12
Close the front cover of the finisher.
Test stapling is automatically performed.
Test stapling will not be performed if the conditions mentioned in step 11 are not met. Be
sure to check the items mentioned in step 11 and open the front cover of the finisher and
then close it again before performing test stapling. Test stapling is necessary to prevent
void stapling.
8
Install the staple cartridge.
When installing a staple cartridge, push
it downward until it is fixed with a click
sound.
9
Pull the handle of the stapler of
the Saddle Stitch Unit toward
you to unlock it. Then return
the stapler to its original posi-
tion.
10
Insert the Saddle Stitch Unit
into the finisher carefully.
21
10 WHEN THIS MESSAGE APPEARS
376 “READY (CHECK SADDLE STITCH STAPLER)”
“READY (CHECK SADDLE STITCH STAPLER)”
This message will be shown only when the Saddle Stitch Finisher (optional) is installed. It
appears when the staples in the stapler of the Saddle Stitch Finisher run out or when the staples
in the Saddle Stitch Finisher are jammed.
Remove the jammed staples according to the procedure in P.373 ““Examine stapler in the
Saddle Stitch Unit””.
If the staples run out, follow the procedure below as well as the procedure in P.366 ““Check
staple cartridge in the Saddle Stitch Unit””.
1
Follow steps 1 to 6 of P.366 ““Check staple cartridge in the Sad-
dle Stitch Unit””.
Do not close the front cover of the Saddle Stitch Finisher.
2
Check the following 2 items to perform test stapling.
yWhether the Saddle Stitch Finisher is securely installed in the equipment.
yWhether any A3, B4 or A4-R paper is set in the equipment.
3
Close the front cover of the Saddle Stitch Finisher.
Test stapling is automatically performed.
If the front cover of the Saddle Stitch Finisher is closed without satisfying the condition of
step 2, test stapling is not performed. Test stapling is necessary to prevent void stapling.
After satisfying the condition of step 2 and opening/closing the front cover of the Saddle
Stitch Finisher again, be sure to perform the test stapling.
“READY (HOLE PUNCH DUST BIN IS FULL)” 377
“READY (HOLE PUNCH DUST BIN IS FULL)”
This message appears when the hole punch dustbin in the Hole Punch Unit (optional) becomes
full.
To dispose of the paper bits, follow the procedure below.
Hole Punch Unit (optional: MJ-6101, MJ-6004)
3
Dispose of the punched paper bits.
4
Attach the hole punch dustbin.
5
Close the cover of the Hole Punch Unit.
1
Open the cover of the Hole
Punch Unit.
2
Pull out the hole punch dust-
bin.
10 WHEN THIS MESSAGE APPEARS
378 “POWER FAILURE”
“POWER FAILURE”
This message appears when a job is interrupted due to a power failure, etc. The print or Fax job
in progress at the time of a power failure may not be completed. Confirm the job status by press-
ing the [JOB STATUS] button. To clear this message, press the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button
twice.
“Time for periodic maintenance” 379
“Time for periodic maintenance”
This message appears when assistance from a qualified service technician is required. Contact
your service representative.
10 WHEN THIS MESSAGE APPEARS
380 “Check paper size setting on control panel for drawer N”
“Check paper size setting on control panel for drawer N”
This message appears when the size of the paper actually placed in the drawer or on the bypass
tray differs from the one registered in the equipment for the corresponding drawer or the bypass
tray. There are 5 messages of this type as shown below.
“Check paper size setting on control panel for drawer 1”
“Check paper size setting on control panel for drawer 2”
“Check paper size setting on control panel for drawer 3”
(Only when the Paper Feed Pedestal (optional) is installed)
“Check paper size setting on control panel for drawer 4”
(Only when the Paper Feed Pedestal and the Additional Drawer Module (optional) are installed)
“Check paper size setting on control panel for Bypass”
In case that a paper misfeed occurs and one of the above messages consequently appears,
another paper misfeed will occur if you just remove the jammed paper. Instead, be sure to follow
the procedure below.
yMake a note of the position of the jammed paper and the number of the drawer displayed in
the message in advance because guidance for removing the jammed paper is not displayed
while you are working on the procedure.
This countermeasure differs depending on when the paper misfeeding has occurred – during
copying or during printing from the Fax or the Printer.
During copying (using a drawer)
1
Turn the power of the equip-
ment OFF.
You cannot shut down the equipment.
“Check paper size setting on control panel for drawer N” 381
2
Remove the jammed paper.
P.329 “Jam Symbols”
6
Press the [USER] button on the touch panel to display the USER
menu, and then press the [DRAWER] button.
3
Pull out the drawer mentioned
in the message. Then remove
all the paper in it.
4
Close the drawer and then turn
the power ON.
5
Press the [USER FUNCTIONS]
button on the control panel.
10 WHEN THIS MESSAGE APPEARS
382 “Check paper size setting on control panel for drawer N”
7
Press the drawer button corresponding to the one mentioned in the
message on the touch panel.
8
Press the paper size button corresponding to the one placed in the
drawer.
P.54 “Preparation 2- Setting Copy Paper”
9
Place the paper removed in step 3 in the drawer.
10
Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button to return to the basic menu.
Set the original and start the copying again.
When “POWER FAILURE” appears, press the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button twice to clear
the message. See P.378 ““POWER FAILURE”” for details.
“Check paper size setting on control panel for drawer N” 383
During copying (using the bypass tray)
2
Remove the jammed paper.
P.329 “Jam Symbols”
5
Place paper on the bypass tray and select the paper size.
P.85 “Bypass Copying”
6
Place the original and try to copy again.
When “POWER FAILURE” appears, press the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button twice to clear
the message. See P.378 ““POWER FAILURE”” for details.
1
Turn the power of the equip-
ment OFF.
You cannot shut down the equipment.
3
Remove all the paper from the
bypass tray.
4
Turn the power ON.
10 WHEN THIS MESSAGE APPEARS
384 “Check paper size setting on control panel for drawer N”
During printing from the FAX or Printer (using a drawer)
2
Remove the jammed paper.
P.329 “Jam Symbols”
1
Turn the power of the equip-
ment OFF.
You cannot shut down the equipment.
3
Pull out the drawer mentioned
in the message. Then remove
all the paper in it.
4
Close the drawer and then turn
the power ON.
“Check paper size setting on control panel for drawer N” 385
5
See the size indication on the touch panel to check the paper size
registered for the drawer mentioned in the message.
6
Place the paper, whose size is same as the one you have checked
at step 5, in the drawer mentioned in the message.
P.54 “Preparation 2- Setting Copy Paper”
7
The job is resumed.
If you change the paper size again after the completion of the job, check that the paper
size placed in the drawer is the same as the one registered in the equipment for the
corresponding drawer.
10 WHEN THIS MESSAGE APPEARS
386 “Check paper size setting on control panel for drawer N”
During printing from the Printer (using the bypass tray)
Paper will not be fed out of the bypass tray during a FAX reception.
2
Remove the jammed paper.
P.329 “Jam Symbols”
1
Turn the power of the equip-
ment OFF.
You cannot shut down the equipment.
3
Remove all the paper from the
bypass tray.
4
Turn the power ON.
“Check paper size setting on control panel for drawer N” 387
6
Place the paper of the size corresponding to the one shown next to
the message “Place Paper in the Bypass tray :” on the bypass tray.
7
Press the [START] button.
5
Press the [JOB STATUS] but-
ton on the control panel.
10 WHEN THIS MESSAGE APPEARS
388 “Cannot print this paper size Select the other drawer”
“Cannot print this paper size Select the other drawer”
When the finisher is installed, A3-Wide paper cannot exit to the receiving tray.
When this message appears, delete the print job, change the paper size you set for printing or
specify the finisher as an exit tray, and try again.
Printing can be performed without deleting the print job in the following two ways. However,
some parts of the original image may be missing because the paper size smaller than A3-Wide
will be used in both cases.
ySelect a drawer button to be set as a paper source on the touch panel, and press the
[START] button.
yPlace paper other than A3-Wide size on the bypass tray and press the [START] button.
Be sure to specify the paper size.
“Cannot print this paper type Set the other paper type” 389
“Cannot print this paper type Set the other paper type”
Special paper can exit only to the receiving tray or the upper tray of the Finisher (MJ-1101).
Delete the print job, select the receiving tray or the upper tray of the Finisher (MJ-1101) as an
exit tray, and try again.
10 WHEN THIS MESSAGE APPEARS
390 “Reboot the machine”
“Reboot the machine”
This message appears when the equipment cannot be operated normally because an error
occurs but it may be released by rebooting the equipment. Since the equipment cannot be shut
down with the control panel, reboot it with the power switch.
11.MAINTENANCE
This chapter describes the maintenance procedures for high-quality copy output, and how to troubleshoot.
Daily Inspection ....................................................................................................392
Simple Troubleshooting .......................................................................................393
Equipment does not start ................................................................................................................393
Paper jamming occurs frequently....................................................................................................393
Display does not change when buttons or icons are pressed.........................................................393
Functions cannot be set ..................................................................................................................394
Image density is too low..................................................................................................................394
Image density is too high ................................................................................................................394
Image trouble ..................................................................................................................................394
11 MAINTENANCE
392 Daily Inspection
Daily Inspection
We recommend you to clean the following items weekly, so that the originals can be scanned in
unsoiled conditions.
Be careful not to scratch the parts that you are cleaning.
1. Scanning area
Clean the surface with a dry soft cloth or a cloth lightly moistened with water.
Do not use solvents such as alcohol.
2. Original glass
3. Guide
4. Platen sheet
Clean the surface as follows depending on the staining.
yClean it with a soft cloth.
yClean it with a soft cloth lightly moistened with water.
yClean it with a soft cloth lightly moistened with alcohol, and then wipe it with a dry cloth.
yClean it with a soft cloth lightly moistened with watered-down neutral detergent, and then
wipe it with a dry cloth.
yDo not use solvents such as thinner or benzine when cleaning the surface of the equipment.
This could warp the shape of the surface or leave it discoloured.
yWhen using a chemical cleaning pad to clean it, follow the instructions.
1
234
Simple Troubleshooting 393
Simple Troubleshooting
Check the following items and, if the problem still occurs, call your service representative for
assistance.
Equipment does not start
Paper jamming occurs frequently
Display does not change when buttons or icons are pressed
Item to be checked Countermeasure Reference page
Is the power cord plug securely
inserted in the outlet?
Insert the power cord plug until it
comes to a stop.
-
Is the front cover firmly closed? Close the cover properly. P.30 “Description of Each
Component”
Item to be checked Countermeasure Reference page
Does the message: “Check
paper size setting on control
panel for drawer N (Bypass)”
appear?
Match the size of the paper
placed in the drawer or on the
bypass tray and the one regis-
tered to the equipment.
P.380 ““Check paper size set-
ting on control panel for drawer
N””
Does the paper placed exceed
the line indicated inside of the
side guide?
Remove some of the sheets of
paper and place them with the
paper height not exceeding the
line indicated.
P.56 “Placing paper in the
drawer”
Is the space between the side
guide of the drawer or the
bypass tray and the paper too
narrow/wide?
Keep an appropriate space
between the side guide and
paper, and then place paper
straight along the side guide.
P.56 “Placing paper in the
drawer”
Has all of the jammed paper
removed?
Since the jammed paper may not
be easily found, follow the guid-
ance shown on the touch panel.
P.329 “Jam Symbols”
Item to be checked Countermeasure Reference page
Is the equipment in the energy
saving mode (Automatic energy
saving mode)?
Press the [ENERGY SAVER /
SHUTDOWN] or [START] button
on the control panel to clear the
mode. (It takes a while for the
equipment to become ready.)
P.52 “Energy Saving Mode”
Is the power OFF because the
weekly timer functions?
Press the [START] button to
return the power ON.
See the [User Function Guide]
When the use of the equipment
is managed under department
management, is the correct
code entered?
Key in the correct department
code.
P.46 “When department or
user management is used”
When the use of the equipment
is managed under user manage-
ment, is the correct information
entered?
Enter the user information cor-
rectly.
P.46 “When department or
user management is used”
Is the “Warming up” message
displayed?
Wait until the equipment
becomes ready.
P.45 “Turning power on”
11 MAINTENANCE
394 Simple Troubleshooting
Functions cannot be set
Image density is too low
Image density is too high
Image trouble
Item to be checked Countermeasure Reference page
Are there functions that cannot
be combined set together?
See the copying function combi-
nation and image quality adjust-
ment combination matrices, and
then set them again.
P.407 “Copying Function Com-
bination Matrix”, P.409 “Image
Quality Adjustment Combination
Matrix”
Item to be checked Countermeasure Reference page
Is the message to replace the
toner cartridge displayed on the
touch panel?
Replace the toner cartridge. P.320 “Replace Toner Car-
tridge Symbol”
Is the level of the colour adjust-
ment set suitably?
Use the manual density buttons
or the background adjustment
function to adjust the image den-
sity properly.
P.140 “Copy Density Adjust-
ment”, P.148 “Background
Adjustment”
Item to be checked Countermeasure Reference page
Is the level of the colour adjust-
ment set suitably?
Use the manual density buttons
or the background adjustment
function to adjust the image den-
sity properly.
P.140 “Copy Density Adjust-
ment”, P.148 “Background
Adjustment”
Phenomenon Usual cause Countermeasure
The copied image is stained. The Automatic Document
Feeder (optional) or the
Platen Cover (optional) is not
lowered fully.
Lower them fully to block outside light.
The original glass, platen
sheet, scanning area or
guides are dirty.
Clean them.
P.392 “Daily Inspection”
The copy density is set
darker.
Make the density lighter if you use the
manual copy density mode. Or use the
automatic copy density mode.
A highly transparent original
is used.
Place a blank sheet of paper, the same
size as the original or larger, over the orig-
inal.
Simple Troubleshooting 395
The copy image is fogged. There is a slight gap
between the original glass
and the original.
Lower the Platen Cover (optional) or the
Automatic Document Feeder (optional)
fully so that the original will contact with
the original glass.
The copy image is partially
missing.
The size or direction of the
copy paper and the original,
or the reproduction ratio is
not set properly.
Use copy paper of the same size as the
original or set the reproduction ratio suit-
able to the copy paper size.
The copy image has black
streaks in a horizontal direc-
tion.
The scanning area or guides
are stained.
Clean them.
P.392 “Daily Inspection”
The main charger is dirty. Clean the main charger.
P.361 “Cleaning the chargers”
The copy image has white
streaks in a horizontal direc-
tion.
The slit glass is dirty. Clean the slit glass.
P.358 “Cleaning the slit glass”
The density level of the copy
image is uneven in a horizon-
tal direction.
The main charger is dirty. Clean the main charger.
P.361 “Cleaning the chargers”
Phenomenon Usual cause Countermeasure
11 MAINTENANCE
396 Simple Troubleshooting
12.SPECIFICATIONS & OPTIONS
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c Specifications......................................................398
Specifications of Options.....................................................................................402
Packing List...........................................................................................................406
Copying Function Combination Matrix...............................................................407
Combination Matrix 1/2 ...................................................................................................................407
Combination Matrix 2/2 ...................................................................................................................408
Image Quality Adjustment Combination Matrix .................................................409
Combination Matrix 1/2 ...................................................................................................................409
Combination Matrix 2/2 ...................................................................................................................410
12 SPECIFICATIONS & OPTIONS
398 e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c Specifications
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c Specifications
Model name FC-2500C/FC-3500C/FC-3510C
Type Desktop type
Original glass Fixed
Printing (copying) system Indirect electrophotographic method
Developing system 2-component magnetic brush developing
Fixing method Belt fusing
Photosensor type OPC
Original scanning system Flat surface scanning system
(When the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder is installed:
Fixed scanning system by feeding the original)
Original scanning sensor Linear CCD sensor
Scanning light source Xenon lamp
Resolution Scanning 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Writing Black-and-white: 2400 dpi x 600 dpi (Smoothing process),1 bit
Colour, Image smoothing: 600 dpi x 600 dpi, 8 bits
Acceptable originals Sheets, books and 3-dimensional objects
Acceptable original size Max. A3
Acceptable copy
paper size
Drawer A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST-
R, COMP, 13" LG, 8.5" SQ, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Bypass Paper size within 100 - 305 mm (Length), 148 - 457 mm (Width)
Acceptable copy
paper weight
Drawer 64 - 163 g/m2
Bypass 64 - 256 g/m2
Warm-up time Approx. 99 seconds
First copy time (A4 portrait) Black-and-white
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c: Approx. 6.5 seconds
e-STUDIO3510c: Approx. 5.2 seconds
Colour
Approx. 8.5 seconds
Continuous copy speed See P.400 “Continuous copying speed”.
Multiple copying Up to 999 copies (digital key entry)
Excluded image width Black-and-
white
Leading edge: 3.0±2.0 mm, Trailing edge: 3.0±2.0 mm,
Both edge: 2.0±2.0 mm
Colour Leading edge: 5.0+2.0/-1.0 mm, Trailing edge: 3.0±2.0 mm,
Both edge: 2.0±2.0 mm
Printer
(Black-and-
white/Colour)
Leading edge: 5.0+2.0/-1.0 mm, Trailing edge: 5.0±2.0 mm,
Both edge: 5.0±2.0 mm
Reproduction ratio Actual size 100±0.5%
Zoom 25 - 400% (in 1% increments)
For the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder 25 - 200%
(in 1% increments)
Paper supply Drawer Approx. 550 sheets (80 g/m2), Approx. 500 sheets (105 g/m2)
Bypass Approx. 100 sheets (80 g/m2), Approx. 80 sheets (105 g/m2)
Receiving tray loading capacity Approx. 550 sheets (90 g/m2)
Toner density adjustment Magnetic auto-toner system
Exposure control Automatic plus manual selection from 11 exposure step
USB interface USB (Full speed)
Environment (for normal use) Temperature: 10 º - 30 ºC, Humidity: 20 - 85% (No Condensation)
Power requirements AC 220 - 240 V±10%, 8 A (50/60 Hz)
Power consumption 1.7 kW or less (including optional equipments)
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c Specifications 399
yThis specification varies depending on the copying conditions and the environment.
ySpecifications and appearance are subject to change without notice in the interest of product
improvement.
Dimensions (equipment only) 699 mm (W) x 761 mm (D) x 759 mm (H)
Weight Approx. 113 kg (equipment including developer and drum)
Space occupied (equipment only) 1055 mm (W) x 855 mm (D)
Storage capacity Max. 1000 sheets or until the memory is full (Toshiba’s own chart)
12 SPECIFICATIONS & OPTIONS
400 e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c Specifications
Continuous copying speed
e-STUDIO2500c
sheets/min.
e-STUDIO3500c
sheets/min.
Paper size Feeder
Media type
PLAIN/
RECYCLED
PAPER
THICK1 THICK2 THICK3
Black
-and-
white
Colour
*1
Black
-and-
white
Colour
*1
Black
-and-
white
Colour
*1
Black
-and-
white
Colour
*1
A4, A5-R,
B5, LT,
ST-R,
8.5" SQ
Drawer352517.517.5----
Bypass
tray
35 25 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5
A4-R, B5-R,
LT-R
Drawer26201313----
Bypass
tray
26 20 13 13 13 13 13 13
B4, FOLIO,
LG, COMP,
13" LG
Drawer221710.510.5----
Bypass
tray
22 17 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5
A3, LDDrawer18158.58.5----
Bypass
tray
18 15 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5
Paper size Feeder
Media type
PLAIN/
RECYCLED
PAPER
THICK1 THICK2 THICK3
Black
-and-
white
Colour
*1
Black
-and-
white
Colour
*1
Black
-and-
white
Colour
*1
Black
-and-
white
Colour
*1
A4, A5-R,
B5, LT,
ST-R,
8.5" SQ
Drawer353517.517.5----
Bypass
tray
35 35 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5
A4-R, B5-R,
LT-R
Drawer26261313----
Bypass
tray
26 26 13 13 13 13 13 13
B4, FOLIO,
LG, COMP,
13" LG
Drawer222210.510.5----
Bypass
tray
22 22 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5
A3, LDDrawer18188.58.5----
Bypass
tray
18 18 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c Specifications 401
e-STUDIO3510c
sheets/min.
*1 FULL COLOUR, TWIN COLOUR, MONO COLOUR, IMAGE SMOOTHING
yThe bypass copying speed is as listed above when specifying the paper size.
yThe values above are measured when originals are set on the original glass, 1-sided, 100%
and non-sort multiple copies are made.
yThis specification varies depending on the copying conditions and the environment.
yToshiba-recommended paper is used for the values of this specification above.
Paper size Feeder
Media type
PLAIN/
RECYCLED
PAPER
THICK1 THICK2 THICK3
Black
-and-
white
Colour
*1
Black
-and-
white
Colour
*1
Black
-and-
white
Colour
*1
Black
-and-
white
Colour
*1
A4, A5-R,
B5, LT,
ST-R,
8.5" SQ
Drawer453517.517.5----
Bypass
tray
45 35 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5
A4-R, B5-R,
LT-R
Drawer32261313----
Bypass
tray
32 26 13 13 13 13 13 13
B4, FOLIO,
LG, COMP,
13" LG
Drawer262210.510.5----
Bypass
tray
26 22 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5
A3, LDDrawer22188.58.5----
Bypass
tray
22 18 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5
12 SPECIFICATIONS & OPTIONS
402 Specifications of Options
Specifications of Options
Reversing Automatic Document Feeder
Large Capacity Feeder
Paper Feed Pedestal (1 drawer type)
Additional Drawer Module
Model name MR-3018
Copy sides 1-side, Duplex
Number of originals
(A4)
100 originals (35 - 80 g/m2) or 16 mm or less in height (more than 80 g/m2)
Feeding speed Black-and-white: 105 - 420 mm
Colour: 52.5 - 210 mm
Acceptable originals A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST-R, COMP (A5
and ST size are not acceptable.)
Paper weight 1-sided original: 35 - 157 g/m2, 2-sided original: 50 - 157 g/m2
Power source DC24 V (supplied from the equipment)
Dimensions 600 mm (W) x 523 mm (D) x 135 mm (H)
Weight Approx. 12.5 kg
Power consumption 49.5 W max.
Model name KD-1019
Acceptable paper size A4
Paper weight 64 - 105 g/m2
Maximum capacity 2500 sheets (80 g/m2), 450 sheets (90 g/m2) (Height: approx. 137 mm x 2)
Power source DC5 V, DC24 V (supplied from the equipment)
Dimensions 623 mm (W) x 657 mm (D) x 308 mm (H) (incl. Stabilizer)
Weight Approx. 27 kg
Model name KD-1018
Acceptable paper size A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST-R, COMP (A5,
ST and non-standard size are not acceptable.)
Paper weight 64 - 163 g/m2
Maximum capacity 550 sheets (80 g/m2), 500 sheets (105 g/m2)
Dimensions 623 mm (W) x 657 mm (D) x 320 mm (H)
Weight Approx. 21.5 kg
Model name MY-1031
Acceptable paper size A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST-R, COMP (A5,
ST and non-standard size are not acceptable.)
Paper weight 64 - 163 g/m2
Maximum capacity 550 sheets (80 g/m2), 500 sheets (105 g/m2)
Weight Approx. 3.8 kg
Specifications of Options 403
Finisher (MJ-1101)
Tray loading capacity of Finisher (MJ-1101)
Unit: mm (with allowable error of ±7 mm)
Values in parentheses: Number of sheets (80 g/m2)
Upper Tray
Lower Tray
When mixed-size paper is loaded, the tray loading capacity should follow the specifications for
larger paper sizes in the above tables.
Model name MJ-1101
Type Floor type (Console type)
Acceptable paper size A3, A3-Wide, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST-R,
COMP, 8.5”SQ, 13”LG
Acceptable paper
weight
60 - 256 g/m2
Number of copies sta-
pled at a time
(Including 2 covers
(60 - 256 g/m2))
Paper size 60 - 80 g/m281 - 90 g/m291 - 105 g/m2
A4, B5, LT, 8.5”SQ 50 sheets 30 sheets 30 sheets
A3, A4-R, B4, FOLIO, LD,
LG, LT-R, COMP, 13”LG
30 sheets 15 sheets 15 sheets
Stapling position Front, Rear, Double
Power source Supplied from the equipment
Dimensions 535 mm (W) x 598 mm (D) x 1092 mm (H)
Weight Approx. 34 kg
Power consumption 70 W max.
MJ-1101 with mixed paper not loaded
Mode Non-Sort
A4, A5-R, B5, LT, ST-R, 8.5”SQ 36.75 mm
(250)
A3, A3-Wide, A4-R, B4, B5-R, FOLIO, LD, LG,
LT-R, COMP, 13”LG
18.4 mm
(125)
MJ-1101 with mixed paper not loaded
Mode Non-Sort Sort/Group Staples loaded
A4, B5, LT, 8.5”SQ 250 mm
(2000)
250 mm
(2000)
Whichever of 250 mm, 2000
sheets or 30 copies is reached
first
A3, A4-R, B4, FOLIO, LD,
LG, LT-R, COMP, 13”LG
140 mm
(1000)
140 mm
(1000)
Whichever of 140 mm, 1000
sheets or 30 copies is reached
first
12 SPECIFICATIONS & OPTIONS
404 Specifications of Options
Saddle Stitch Finisher (MJ-1030)
Tray loading capacity of Saddle Stitch Finisher (MJ-1030)
(MJ-1030 with mixed paper not loaded)
Unit: mm (with allowable error of ±7 mm)
Values in parentheses: Number of sheets (80 g/m2)
ySort/Group/Staple is not available with A5-R, B5-R, ST-R.
ySee P.124 “Available conditions for saddle stitching” for tray loading capacity of saddle
stitch tray.
yIf copied paper remains on the receiving tray and the next copying job is performed, the load-
ing capacity is the same as that for mixed paper.
(MJ-1030 with mixed paper loaded)
Unit: mm (with allowable error of ±7 mm)
Values in parentheses: Number of sheets (80 g/m2)
Model name MJ-1030
Type Floor type (Console type)
Acceptable paper size A3, A3-Wide, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST-R,
COMP
Acceptable paper weight 64 - 256 g/m2
Number of copies stapled
at a time
(Including 2 covers
(64 - 256 g/m2))
Paper size 80 g/m290 g/m2105 g/m2
A4, B5, LT 50 sheets 26 sheets 24 sheets
A3, A4-R, B4, FOLIO, LD,
LG, LT-R, COMP
30 sheets 15 sheets 15 sheets
Stapling position Front, Rear, Double
Stitching capacity
(Including 1 cover
(64 - 256 g/m2))
Paper size 80 g/m290 g/m2105 g/m2
A3, A4-R, B4, LD, LT-R 15 sheets 10 sheets 10 sheets
Power source Supplied from the equipment
Dimensions 649 mm (762 mm) (W) x 657 mm (D) x 1068 mm (H)
Weight Approx. 70 kg
Power consumption 170 W max.
Mode Non-Sort Sort/Group Staples loaded
Tray No. 1 2 1 2 1 2
A4, A5-R, B5,
LT, ST-R
147 mm
(1000)
147 mm
(1000)
Whichever of 147 mm,
1000 sheets or 30 cop-
ies is reached first
Whichever of 147 mm,
1000 sheets or 30 cop-
ies is reached first
A3, A4-R, B4,
B5-R, FOLIO,
LD, LG, LT-R,
COMP
73.5 mm
(500)
73.5 mm
(500)
Whichever of 73.5 mm,
500 sheets or 30 copies
is reached first
Whichever of 73.5 mm,
500 sheets or 30 copies
is reached first
Mode Non-Sort Sort/Group Staples loaded
Tray No. 1212 1 2
FOLIO and
A4-R
73.5 mm
(500)
73.5 mm
(500)
Whichever of 73.5
mm, 500 sheets or 30
copies is reached first
Whichever of 73.5
mm, 500 sheets or 30
copies is reached first
A3 and A4
B4 and B5
LD and LT
LG and LT-R
Specifications of Options 405
Hole Punch Unit (MJ-6101 Series)
Hole Punch Unit (MJ-6004 Series)
Bridge Unit
yToshiba-recommended paper is used for the values above. Specifications and appearance
are subject to change without notice in the interest of product improvement.
Model name MJ-6101 Series
Acceptable paper size A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, LD, LG, LT, LT-R, COMP, 8.5”SQ, 13”LG
Acceptable paper weight 64 - 256 g/m2
(OHP film and specially treated paper are not available.)
Dimensions 112 mm (W) x 617 mm (D) x 378 mm (H) (excl. Lower cover)
Weight Approx. 9 kg
Number of punching holes and hole diameter Available paper size
Japan and most of
Europe (MJ-6101E)
2 holes
(6.5 mm dia.)
A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, B5-R,
FOLIO, LD, LG, LT, LT-R, COMP
North America
(MJ-6101N)
2/3 holes switchable
(8.0 mm dia.)
2 holes: A4-R, LG, LT-R
3 holes: A3, A4, LD, LT
France
(MJ-6101F)
4 holes
(6.5 mm dia.; 80 mm pitch)
A3, A4, LD, LT
Sweden
(MJ-6101S)
4 holes
(6.5 mm dia.; 70 mm and 21 mm pitch)
A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, B5-R,
FOLIO, LD, LG, LT-R, COMP
Model name MJ-6004 Series
Acceptable paper size A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, LD, LG, LT, LT-R, COMP
Acceptable paper weight 64 - 256 g/m2
(OHP film and specially treated paper are not available.)
Dimensions 112 mm (W) x 617 mm (D) x 378 mm (H) (excl. Lower cover)
Weight Approx. 9 kg
Number of punching holes and hole diameter Available paper size
Japan and most of
Europe (MJ-6004E)
2 holes
(6.5 mm dia.)
A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, B5-R,
FOLIO, LD, LG, LT, LT-R, COMP
North America
(MJ-6004N)
2/3 holes switchable
(8.0 mm dia.)
2 holes: A4-R, LG, LT-R
3 holes: A3, A4, LD, LT
France
(MJ-6004F)
4 holes
(6.5 mm dia.; 80 mm pitch)
A3, A4, LD, LT
Sweden
(MJ-6004S)
4 holes
(6.5 mm dia.; 70 mm and 21 mm pitch)
A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, B5-R,
FOLIO, LD, LG, LT-R, COMP
Model name KN-3500
12 SPECIFICATIONS & OPTIONS
406 Packing List
Packing List
Packing list Operator’s Manual
Photoconductive drum
Operator’s Manual pocket
Setup report
CD-ROM (2 pcs.)
Stopper (for control panel)
Copying Function Combination Matrix 407
Copying Function Combination Matrix
Combination Matrix 1/2
*1 *1 Yes *1 *1 *4 *4 *4 *4 *4 *4 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 Yes *1 *4 *1
No No *5 *4 *4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No *4 Yes *4 Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes *4 Yes Yes *4 Yes
Yes *3 Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes *4 Yes Yes *4 Yes
Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes No *4 Yes
Yes *3 Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes No *4 Yes
Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes
*4 Yes *5 Yes Yes *4 *4 *4 *4 *4 *4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes *5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes *5 Yes Yes No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes *5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No
No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No
Yes Yes *5 No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes
Yes Yes *5 No No No No No No Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No
Yes Yes *5 No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes *5 No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
Yes Yes Yes -- Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -- Yes -- Yes Yes
Yes Yes *5 *4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes
Yes Yes *5 No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No No
Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes
*4 *4 *5 No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes *6 Yes Yes Yes
*4 *4 No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
Yes Yes *5 No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No Yes
Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No
Yes *3 Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No
Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No
Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
*4 *4 No No No Yes Yes -- -- --
*4 *4 No No No Yes Yes -- --
*4 *4 No No No Yes Yes --
*4 *4 No No No Yes Yes
*4 *4 No No Yes -- *1 Size selection is required.
*4 *4 No No No *2 Size selection is required for [DOUBLE STAPLE] and [REAR STAPLE].
*4 *4 No No *3 The data stored into the file are the same as the ones for simplex copying.
No No No *4 The function set later will be valid.
*5 *5 *5 The setting cannot be changed from 2nd job or later.
No *6 Bookbinding margin is not available.
*7 Available when the paper width is the same
Image repeat
Image
repeat
Image
shift
2IN1/4IN1
Rotate sort
Saddle stitch
Dual page Book
centre
erase
Job build
Mirror
2 - 1 Split
XY zoomEditing
TrimTop
copied
back
blank
Both
blank
Nega/Pos
Cover sheet
Bypass copy
Sheet insertion
1 - 1 Simplex
2 - 2 Duplex
Photo zoom
1 - 2 Duplex
MaskTop
copied
Top blank
Copy &
File
Full image
Copied Blank
Copy & File
Store to e-Filing
Job build
Top copied back blank
Full image
Blank
Sheet
insertion
Cover
sheet Both blank
Top copied
2IN1/4IN1
Top blank
XY zoom
Dual page
Editing
Nega/Pos
Mask
Trim
Mirror
Staple sort
Image shift
Edge erase
Book - Tablet
Image direction
SADF
Mixed original sizes
Copied
Store to
e-Filing
Group
Sort
Non-sort/Non-staple
Book - 2
Hole punch
Magazine sort & Saddle stitch
Book centre erase
Magazine sort
12 SPECIFICATIONS & OPTIONS
408 Copying Function Combination Matrix
Combination Matrix 2/2
*1 *1 Yes Yes *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *2 Yes Yes Yes *1 *1 Yes *1 Yes *1
Yes No No Yes No No *4 Yes *4 *4 Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes *4 Yes Yes Yes Yes *4 Yes *4 *4 Yes Yes Yes Yes -- -- -- --
Yes *4 Yes Yes Yes Yes *4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -- -- --
Yes *4 Yes Yes Yes Yes *4 Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes -- --
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes --
Yes No Yes -- No No *4 Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes *4 -- Yes -- -- -- -- --
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes *4 -- Yes -- -- -- --
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes *4 -- Yes -- -- --
Yes Yes Yes Yes *7 *4 -- Yes -- --
Yes No Yes Yes No *4 -- No --
Yes No Yes Yes No *4 -- No
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
Yes No Yes Yes No *4
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
No Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
*1 Size selection is required.
*2 Size selection is required for [DOUBLE STAPLE] and [REAR STAPLE].
*3 The data stored into the file are the same as the ones for simplex copying.
*4 The function set later will be valid.
*5 The setting cannot be changed from 2nd job or later.
*6 Bookbinding margin is not available.
*7 Available when the paper width is the same
Photo zoom
Photo
zoom
Image repeat
Bypass copy
2 - 1
Split
1 - 2
Duplex
1 - 1
Simplex
Sort Non-sort/
Non-
staple
Book - 2 2 - 2
Duplex
Magazine
sort &
Saddle
stitch
Magazine
sort
Staple
sort
GroupMixed
original
sizes
Rotate
sort
Saddle
stitch
Hole
punch
Edge
erase
Book -
Tablet
Image
direction
SADF
Copied
Group
Sort
Non-sort/Non-staple
Hole punch
Magazine sort & Saddle stitch
Magazine sort
2IN1/4IN1
Top copied
Top blank
Book - 2
Image shift
Edge erase
Book - Tablet
Image direction
2 - 1 Split
1 - 2 Duplex
1 - 1 Simplex
Copy & File
Store to e-Filing
Job build
Blank
Sheet
insertion
Full image
Top copied back blank
Both blank
2 - 2 Duplex
Staple sort
Rotate sort
Mixed original sizes
Saddle stitch
Book centre erase
SADF
XY zoom
Nega/Pos
Mask
Trim
Mirror
Cover
sheet
Dual page
Editing
Bypass
copy
Image Quality Adjustment Combination Matrix 409
Image Quality Adjustment Combination Matrix
Combination Matrix 1/2
Yes Yes Yes *2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No No No No Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes
No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes
No No No Yes Yes No Yes No No No No No No
No No Yes Yes *1 *1 No No No No No No No
No Yes Yes *1 *1 No No No No No No No No
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No
No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes No No
No Yes Yes No No No No No Yes Yes No No
Yes Yes No No No No No Yes Yes No No
Yes No No No No No Yes Yes No No
No No No No No Yes Yes No No
No No No No No No No No
No No No No No No No
No No No No No No
No No No No No
No No No No
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
*1
*2
Only available with manual adjustment
*3
Only available with TWIN COLOUR mode
*4
Only available with RED & BLACK mode
Twin Colour (2-Colour)
Copy TWIN colour
SELECTABLE
Black
Colour
balance
Sharpness RGB
Adjustment
One-Touch Adjustment
Density Manual /Auto
Mono colour
Colour
Mode
Auto colour
Full colour
Background
Adjustment
TWIN colour
SELECTABLE
Adjustment
Hue
RGB Adjustment
Sharpness
Background Adjustment
Vivid
Warm
Cool
One-
Touch
Adjust
ment
Marker
TWIN colour SELECTABLE
Adjustment
Clear
Saturation
Twin Colour (2-Colour)
Copy RED & BLACK
Cool Warm Vivid
Original
Mode
Marker
Text/Photo
Text
Photo
Printed image
Red & Black
Range
Adjustment
Only available when colour mode is FULL COLOUR and original mode is
PRINTED IMAGE, or colour mode is BLACK and original mode is PHOTO
Map
Image smoothing
Colour balance
Clear
Saturation
Red & Black Range Adjustment
Hue
12 SPECIFICATIONS & OPTIONS
410 Image Quality Adjustment Combination Matrix
Combination Matrix 2/2
Twin Colour (2-Colour)
Copy TWIN colour
SELECTABLE
Black
Density Manual /Auto
Mono colour
Colour
Mode
Auto colour
Full colour
RGB Adjustment
Sharpness
Background Adjustment
Vivid
Warm
Cool
One-
Touch
Adjust
ment
Marker
TWIN colour SELECTABLE
Adjustment
Twin Colour (2-Colour)
Copy RED & BLACK
Original
Mode
Text/Photo
Text
Photo
Printed image
Map
Image smoothing
Colour balance
Clear
Saturation
Red & Black Range Adjustment
Hue
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes No No No No No Yes Yes No No
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes *3 *3
No No No No No Yes Yes *3 *4
No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No Yes No Yes Yes No
No No Yes Yes No No
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No Yes
Yes Yes
No
*1
*2
Only available with manual adjustment
*3
Onl
y
available with TWIN COLOUR mode
*4
Only available with RED & BLACK mode
Image
smoothing
Density
Manual /
Auto
Black
Twin Colour
(2-Colour)
Copy RED
& BLACK
Twin Colour (2-
Colour) Copy
TWIN colour
SELECTABLE
Mono
colour
PhotoMap
Colour Mode
Printed
image
Original Mode
Full colourText/Photo Auto colourText
Only available when colour mode is FULL COLOUR and original mode is PRINTED
IMAGE, or colour mode is BLACK and original mode is PHOTO
INDEX 411
INDEX
Numerics
1-sided original -> 1-sided copy ..........129, 130
1-sided original -> 2-sided copy ..........129, 131
2-colour copy ............................................ 150
2IN1 / 4IN1 ............................................... 173
2-sided original -> 1-sided copy ..........129, 133
2-sided original -> 2-sided copy ..........129, 132
A
Acceptable copy paper ................................ 54
ACCESS button .......................................... 38
Additional Drawer Module ............. 31, 34, 402
ADF ......................................................... 201
Adjusting the contrast of the touch panel ....... 43
AMS ........................................................ 104
APS ........................................................... 98
APS/AMS or currently selected paper size ..... 41
Automatic copy density mode ..................... 140
Automatic duplexing unit ......................30, 335
Automatic function clear .............................. 43
Automatic Magnification Selection (AMS) .... 104
Automatic Paper Selection (APS) ................. 98
AUTOMATIC START ........................ 244, 253
B
Background adjustment ............................. 148
Black toner cartridge ...........................33, 320
BLANK .................................................... 188
Blinking graphic symbols ........................... 318
BOOK - TABLET ....................................... 200
BOOK CENTRE ERASE ............................ 169
Book-type original -> 2-sided copy ......129, 134
Book-type originals ..................................... 71
BOTH BLANK ........................................... 185
Bottom margin .......................................... 161
Bridge Unit ................................ 34, 340, 405
Bypass copying
Bypass copying ....................................... 85
Non-standard size paper ........................... 91
Standard size paper ................................. 86
Bypass tray ................................. 30, 85, 334
C
Call service symbol ................................... 351
Canceling the energy saving mode ............... 53
Caution ...................................................... 22
Changing the data of a template ................. 257
Changing the data of a user group .............. 254
Changing the data of user boxes ................ 215
Changing the setting of paper size ................ 61
Charger cleaner .......................................... 33
Cleaning .................................................. 392
CLEAR button ............................................ 38
Clearing functions selected .......................... 43
Clearing the drawer for special uses ............. 64
Colour balance ..........................................144
Colour mode .............................................103
Colour mode button .....................................41
Colour toner cartridge ................................320
Configuration of options ...............................34
Confirming and canceling auto job .................83
Confirming job history in log list ...................297
Confirming print job status ..........................275
Confirming scan job status .........................295
Connector for USB storage device ................31
Continuing printing after proof printing .........280
Continuous feed mode ........................ 73, 201
Control panel ....................................... 33, 37
COPIED ...................................................188
COPY button ..............................................37
Copy density adjustment ............................140
Copying function combination matrix ...........407
Copying mixed-sized originals
in one operation .....................................101
Copying procedure ......................................77
COVER SHEET ........................................185
Creating user boxes ..................................212
Cyan toner cartridge ....................................33
D
Daily inspection .........................................392
Date and time .............................................41
Deleting a template ....................................269
Deleting a user group .................................267
Deleting folders or documents ....................230
Deleting invalid print jobs ...........................289
Deleting print jobs ......................................276
Deleting private print jobs ...........................286
Deleting proof print jobs .............................281
Deleting user boxes ...................................218
Density adjustment buttons ..........................41
Department codes .....................................287
Department management .............................46
Description of each component .....................30
Digital keys .................................................38
Disclaimer notice .........................................27
Displaying invalid queues ...........................287
Displaying private print job list .....................282
Displaying proof print job list .......................279
Drawer ................................31, 56, 319, 380
Drawer feeding area ..................................332
Drawer for special uses ................................62
DUAL PAGE .............................................171
Duplex copying .........................................129
E
EDGE ERASE ..........................................167
EDITING ..................................................178
e-Filing .....................................................210
e-FILING button ..........................................37
ENERGY SAVER/SHUTDOWN button ... 38, 53
412 INDEX
Energy saving mode .................................... 52
Enlargement and reduction copying ............ 104
Enlargement/Reduction (Zoom...) button ....... 41
Equipment status indication area .................. 41
Error code ........................................307, 318
ERROR lamp ............................................. 38
EXTENSION button .................................... 37
F
FAX button ................................................. 37
Features of the e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c
............................................................... 19
Finisher
Finisher ............................... 114, 364, 370
Name of each part in the Finisher ............ 115
Removing jammed staples ...................... 370
Saddle Stitch Finisher ............................ 346
Finisher button ............................................ 41
Fixed tray ................................................. 115
Folder ...................................................... 230
Front cover .........................................31, 115
FULL IMAGE ............................................ 204
FUNCTION CLEAR button ........................... 38
Function setting area ................................... 41
Fuser unit ................................................. 337
G
General precautions
During maintenance or inspection .............. 26
General precautions ................................. 21
When handling supplies ............................ 26
When installing or moving ......................... 21
When using the Multifunctional digital
colour systems ........................................ 23
Group copying ..................................114, 116
H
Handling and storing paper .......................... 55
HELP button ............................................... 37
Hole punch .......................................114, 125
Hole Punch Unit .........35, 114, 115, 346, 405
I
IMAGE DIRECTION .................................. 198
Image quality adjustment combination matrix 409
IMAGE REPEAT ....................................... 206
IMAGE SHIFT .......................................... 161
Index buttons .............................................. 41
Initial (default) settings ................................. 76
INTERRUPT button ..................................... 38
Interrupt copying in progress and
make other copies (Interrupt copying) ........ 84
J
Jam releasing cover .................................. 336
Jam symbols ............................................ 329
JOB BUILD ...............................................194
Job status .................................................274
JOB STATUS button ....................................38
K
K format .....................................................68
Keying in correct department code to print ...288
L
Large Capacity Feeder ..........31, 34, 333, 402
LDAP authentication ....................................47
Left margin ...............................................161
Log list .....................................................296
M
Magazine sort .................................. 114, 176
Magazine sort & Saddle stitch ............ 114, 122
Magenta toner cartridge ...............................33
Maintenance .............................................392
Making Copies ............................................76
Manual copy density mode .........................141
Manual paper selection ..............................100
Margin ..................................... 161, 163, 165
Masking ...................................................178
Maximum number of sheets for scanning .......69
Maximum number of sheets for stapling .......121
Message ....................................................41
Message display .........................................41
MFP local authentication ..............................47
Mirror image .............................................181
MONITOR/PAUSE button ............................38
Moving print jobs .......................................278
N
Negative/Positive reversal ..........................182
Network interface connector .........................31
Number of copy sets ....................................41
O
One-touch adjustment ................................147
One-touch zoom buttons ............................108
Operator’s Manual pocket ............................30
Original Cover .............................................34
Original glass ..............................................32
Original mode ...........................................138
Original mode button ...................................41
Original scale ..............................................33
Original stopper ...........................................68
P
Packing list ...............................................406
PAGE NUMBER ........................................192
Paper exit stopper .......................................33
Paper feed cover .........................................30
Paper feed cover (optional) ..........................31
Paper Feed Pedestal .................... 31, 34, 402
INDEX 413
Paper selection ........................................... 98
Paper size indicator ...............................31, 59
Paper source selection buttons ..................... 41
Paper type ................................................. 62
Pausing print jobs ..................................... 277
Photo zoom .............................................. 110
Placing originals on the glass ....................... 70
Placing paper in the drawer .......................... 56
Platen sheet ............................................... 32
Power switch .............................................. 31
PRINT DATA / MEMORY RX /
FAX communication lamps ....................... 37
Print jobs .................................................. 275
Print log ................................................... 297
Print status display .................................... 304
Printing journals ........................................ 303
Printing private print jobs ........................... 285
Printing stored documents ......................... 225
Private print jobs ....................................... 282
Proof Copy ................................................. 95
PROOF COPY button .................................. 41
Proof print jobs ......................................... 279
Public box ................................................ 210
Public group ............................................. 262
Public template group ................................ 240
R
Recalling templates ................................... 262
Receive log .............................................. 299
Receiving tray ............................................. 33
Recommended paper .................................. 55
Registering a template
in the public template group .................... 240
Registering a template
in the user group .................................... 249
Registering into address book
from log lists .......................................... 301
Registering non-standard size
in the memory ......................................... 94
Registering the new user group .................. 246
Releasing print job errors ........................... 304
Remaining paper level ................................. 41
Replace toner bag symbol ......................... 327
Replace toner cartridge symbol .................. 320
Reproduction ratio ....................................... 41
Reversing Automatic Document Feeder
..................................30, 34, 72, 329, 402
RGB adjustment ....................................... 146
Right margin ............................................. 161
Rotate sort .......................................114, 118
S
Saddle stitch
Available conditions ................................124
Saddle stitch ......................... 114, 348, 366
Saddle Stitch Finisher .................... 114, 404
Saddle stitch tray ....................................115
Saddle Stitch Finisher ..................................35
SADF .......................................................201
SCAN button ...............................................37
Scan log ...................................................300
Scanning area .............................................33
Scanning the next originals during copying
(Auto job start) .........................................82
Send log ...................................................298
Setting copy paper ......................................54
Setting letters ..............................................44
Setting originals ..........................................68
SETTINGS button .......................................41
Sharpness ................................................149
SHEET INSERTION ..................................188
Sheet originals ............................................70
Simplex / duplex button ................................41
Single feed mode ............................... 74, 202
Slit glass cleaner .........................................33
Sort copying .................................... 114, 116
Specifications
e-STUDIO2500c/3500c/3510c .................398
Options .................................................402
Specifying both original size and
copy size separately ...............................106
Staple sort ....................................... 114, 120
Stapler ................... 362, 366, 368, 372, 373
START button .............................................38
STOP button ...............................................38
Stopping the copying operation .....................81
Storage of colour copies ...............................28
Storing documents in e-Filing ......................220
Sub-tray ...................................................115
Switching colour mode ...............................103
T
Template ..................................................238
TEMPLATE button ......................................37
Test printing ..............................................227
TIME STAMP ............................................191
Toner bag .......................................... 33, 327
TOP BLANK .............................................185
TOP COPIED ...........................................185
TOP COPIED BACK BLANK ......................185
Top margin ...............................................161
Touch panel ................................... 32, 38, 41
Touch panel contrast adjustment dial .............33
Touch-buttons .............................................41
Tray .........................................................115
Trimming ..................................................178
414 INDEX
Troubleshooting
Display does not change when buttons
or icons are pressed ............................... 393
Equipment does not start ........................ 393
Functions cannot be set .......................... 394
Image density is too high ........................ 394
Image density is too low ......................... 394
Paper jamming occurs frequently ............. 393
Turning power off (Shutdown) ...................... 50
Turning power on ........................................ 45
Twin colour copy ....................................... 150
Type of finishing mode .............................. 114
U
Upper cover ............................................. 115
USB print ................................................. 290
USB terminal (4-pin) .................................... 31
Useful template ......................................... 238
User box ..........................................210, 212
USER FUNCTIONS button .......................... 37
User group .......................................248, 264
User management ..............................47, 274
W
Warning ..................................................... 21
Windows Domain Authentication .................. 47
X
XY ZOOM ................................................ 183
Y
Yellow toner cartridge .................................. 33
Z
Zoom buttons ........................................... 108
Printed in China
FC-2500C/3500C/3510C
OME060003A0
2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL COLOUR SYSTEMS
Operator's Manual for Basic Functions
2-17-2, HIGASHIGOTANDA, SHINAGAWA-KU, TOKYO, 141-8664, JAPAN
R060120A6701-TTEC
Ver01 2006-10
26

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Toshiba e-STUDIO 3500c bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Toshiba e-STUDIO 3500c in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 9.4 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Toshiba e-STUDIO 3500c

Toshiba e-STUDIO 3500c Snelstart handleiding - Nederlands - 56 pagina's

Toshiba e-STUDIO 3500c Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 395 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info